Download Samsung Q1233 Service manual

RX-8010VBK
SERVICE MANUAL
AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
RX-8010VBK
Area Suffix
J
CATV/DBS VCR 1
TV
AUDIO
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
VCR 1
SURROUND
ON/OFF
DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
MODE
BASS
LINE DIF.ECT BOOST
INPUT
EFFECT
ROOM
SIZE
2
3
1
RX-8010V
MENU
MIDNIGHT
MODE
TEST
FM/AM TUNING
CTR TONE LIVENESS
4
5
∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
8
7/P
0
10
RETURN
TV/VIDEO
+
FM MODE
∗BAL L
∗
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
∗BAL R
MENU
FM/AM PRESET
STANDBY
−
PLAY
POWER
D I G I T A L
+10
100+
SURROUND
D I G I T A L
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
+
SURROUND ON/OFF
VOLUME
−
EXIT
MASTER VOLUME
MEMORY
9
DSP MODE
/REW
PAUSE
INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
TV SOUND/DBS
DIGITAL LEVEL
EQ
ADJUST
LINE DIRECT
EFFECT SETTING
BASS BOOST
INPUT ATT
SOUCE NAME
VIDEO
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
FM / AM
FF/
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
SET
REC
PAUSE
VIDEO
MIDNIGHT MODE
2
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
S-VIDEO
TEXT
DISPLAY
AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
FM MODE
6
ENTER
SOUND
MUTING
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
U.S.A.
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SOUCE NAME
STOP CONTROL
PHONES
RM-SRX8010J
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
D I G I T A L
Contents
Safety precautions --------------------------------------------------------1-2
Importance administering point on the safety --------------------- 1-3
Disassembly method -----------------------------------------------------1-4
Adjustment method -------------------------------------------------------1-10
Self-diagnose function ----------------------------------------------------1-11
Description of major ICs -------------------------------------------------1-13
COPYRIGHT
2001 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LTD.
No.20921
Mar. 2001
http://getMANUAL.com
RX-8010VBK
1. This design of this product contains special hardware and many circuits and components specially
for safety purposes. For continued protection, no changes should be made to the original design
unless authorized in writing by the manufacturer. Replacement parts must be identical to those
used in the original circuits. Services should be performed by qualified personnel only.
2. Alterations of the design or circuitry of the product should not be made. Any design alterations of
the product should not be made. Any design alterations or additions will void the manufacturer`s
warranty and will further relieve the manufacture of responsibility for personal injury or property
damage resulting therefrom.
3. Many electrical and mechanical parts in the products have special safety-related characteristics.
These characteristics are often not evident from visual inspection nor can the protection afforded
by them necessarily be obtained by using replacement components rated for higher voltage,
wattage, etc. Replacement parts which have these special safety characteristics are identified in
the Parts List of Service Manual. Electrical components having such features are identified by
shading on the schematics and by ( ) on the Parts List in the Service Manual. The use of a
substitute replacement which does not have the same safety characteristics as the recommended
replacement parts shown in the Parts List of Service Manual may create shock, fire, or other
hazards.
4. The leads in the products are routed and dressed with ties, clamps, tubings, barriers and the
like to be separated from live parts, high temperature parts, moving parts and/or sharp edges
for the prevention of electric shock and fire hazard. When service is required, the original lead
routing and dress should be observed, and it should be confirmed that they have been returned
to normal, after re-assembling.
5. Leakage currnet check (Electrical shock hazard testing)
After re-assembling the product, always perform an isolation check on the exposed metal parts
of the product (antenna terminals, knobs, metal cabinet, screw heads, headphone jack, control
shafts, etc.) to be sure the product is safe to operate without danger of electrical shock.
Do not use a line isolation transformer during this check.
Plug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet. Using a "Leakage Current Tester", measure
the leakage current from each exposed metal parts of the cabinet , particularly any exposed
metal part having a return path to the chassis, to a known good earth ground. Any leakage
current must not exceed 0.5mA AC (r.m.s.)
Alternate check method
Plug the AC line cord directly into the AC outlet. Use an AC voltmeter having, 1,000 ohms
per volt or more sensitivity in the following manner. Connect a 1,500 10W resistor paralleled by
a 0.15 F AC-type capacitor between an exposed
AC VOLTMETER
metal part and a known good earth ground.
(Having 1000
Measure the AC voltage across the resistor with the
ohms/volts,
or more sensitivity)
AC voltmeter.
Move the resistor connection to eachexposed metal
part, particularly any exposed metal part having a
0.15 F AC TYPE
return path to the chassis, and meausre the AC
Place this
voltage across the resistor. Now, reverse the plug in
probe on
the AC outlet and repeat each measurement. voltage
each exposed
1500 10W
metal part.
measured Any must not exceed 0.75 V AC (r.m.s.).
This corresponds to 0.5 mA AC (r.m.s.).
Good earth ground
1. This equipment has been designed and manufactured to meet international safety standards.
2. It is the legal responsibility of the repairer to ensure that these safety standards are maintained.
3. Repairs must be made in accordance with the relevant safety standards.
4. It is essential that safety critical components are replaced by approved parts.
5. If mains voltage selector is provided, check setting for local voltage.
!
1-2
Burrs formed during molding may be left over on some parts of the chassis. Therefore,
pay attention to such burrs in the case of preforming repair of this system.
RX-8010VBK
Importance administering point on the safety
131
LVA10222-A6
R61
B3191
132
RY63
113
CN55
B3152
B3151
PW19
B3148
B3147
B3146
B3145
B3144
B3142
PW26
PW18
FC2
D67
112
B3150
6.3A-125V
PW30
B3149
FC1
PW17
B3143
B3141
PW20
TA2
RY62
TA1
CN56
CN811
111
R1
B3192
123
122
EP1
LVA10222-A3
121
2A-125V
FC62
FC61
134
FC64
2A-125V
FC63
133
Caution: For continued protection against risk of
fire, replace only with same type 6.3A/125V for
F201, 2A/125V for F202 and F203. This symbol
specifies type of fast operating fuse.
Precaution: Pour eviter risques de feux, remplacez
le fusible de surete de F201 comme le meme type
que 6.3A/125V, et 2A/125V pour F202 et F203.
^
Ce sont des fusibles suretes
qui functionnes rapide.
1-3
RX-8010VBK
Disassembly method
Top cover
B
Removing the top cover (See Fig.1)
1. Remove the four screws A attaching the top cover
on both sides of the body.
2. Remove the three screws B on the back of the body.
A
3. Remove the top cover from behind in the direction of
the arrow while pulling both sides outward.
2
A
Fig.1
2
Front panel assembly
C
Removing the front panel assembly
(See Fig.2 to 3)
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover.
1. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN400 on
the audio board and CN402 on the power supply
board in the front panel assembly.
a
C
Tie band
CN402
Main
board
Power
supply
board
CN400
2. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.
Audio board
3. Remove the three screws C attaching the front
panel assembly and the screw a fixing a ground.
Fig.2
4. Remove the four screws D attaching the front panel
assembly on the bottom of the body. Detach the front
panel assembly toward the front.
Front panel assembly
D
D
Removing the rear panel (See Fig.4)
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover.
Fig.3
1. Remove the power cord stopper from the rear panel
by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
E
E E
E
Cord stopper
2. Remove the thirty four screws E attaching the each
boards to the rear panel on the back of the body.
3. Remove the three screws F attaching the rear panel
on the back of the body.
F
F
Rear panel
F
Fig.4
1-4
E
RX-8010VBK
Removing each board connected to the
rear side of the audio board
(See Fig.5 to 11)
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover and the rear panel.
Tie band
1. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.
2. Disconnect the connect CN501, CN243, CN205,
CN381, CN361 on the DVD board.
3. Disconnect the harness from connector CN721,
CN722 and CN723.
CN361
CN381
CN205 CN243
CN501
Fig.5
4. Disconnect the tuner board and audio board from
connector CN101 and CN301 on the audio board.
CN721
CN722
5. Pull out the video audio board, video board, S-video
board.
6. Disconnect the DSP board from connector CN601 on
the audio board.
CN723
CN731
CN732
Fig.6
DVD board
Audio
board
CN416
CN206
Fig.7
CN244
CN303
CN201
CN241
Tuner
board
Video audio
board
Video
board
Fig.9
S Video
board
CN101
CN301
Audio input
board
Fig.8
1-5
RX-8010VBK
Video audio
board
Video
board
S Video
board
Fig.10
DSP board
CN601
Fig.11
Relay board
CN814 CN813
CN71
Removing the audio board
(See Fig.12 to 13)
power
supply
board
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover and the rear panel.
1. Disconnect the harness from connector CN813 and
CN814 on the main board.
Main
board
Tie band
2. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN931 and
CN932 on the audio board.
3. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.
Power
transformer
Audio board
CN931/ 932
CN81
Fig.12
4. Disconnect the relay board from the audio board and
the power supply board. (CN71,CN81)
5. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN831 on
the main board.
6. Remove the three screws G
board assembly.
7. Remove the screw H
assembly.
attaching the audio
CN831
attaching the audio board
G
G
Fig.13
1-6
H
Power / Fuse
board
RX-8010VBK
Removing the main board
(See Fig.14)
J I
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover, the rear panel and audio board.
I
J
1. Cut off the tie band fixing the harness.
3. Disconnect the harness from connector CN881 on
the main board.
CN811
J
2. Disconnect the harness from connector CN811 on
the power supply board respectively.
I
Main
board
4. Remove the four screws I and the two screws J
attaching the main board.
CN881
Tie band
I
Fig.14
Removing the Heat sink
(See Fig.15 to 16)
1. Remove the ten screws K and four screws L
attaching the heat sink.
Heat sink
K
K
K
L
L
2. Remove the two screws L' attaching the heat sink
from the rear side of main board.
Fig.15
L'
L'
Main board
rear side
Fig.16
1-7
RX-8010VBK
Removing the power transformer
(See Fig.17)
Prior to performing the following procedures, remove
the top cover.
Power
Power
supply
board
transformer
1. Unsolder the two harnesses connected to the power board
transformer.
2. Disconnect the harness from connector CN55 and
CN56 on the power transformer board.
3. Remove the four screws M
transformer.
CN55 / 56
M
attaching the power
Power
transformer
M
Removing the power / fuse board
(See Fig.17)
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover and the rear panel.
1. Remove the screw N
board.
N
attaching the power / fuse
Solder
Solder
2. Unsolder the power cord and other harnesses
connected to the power / fuse board.
Power cord Power / fuse board
Fig.17
Removing the power supply board
(See Fig.18 to 19)
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover and the front panel.
1. Remove the screws b fixing a bonding ground.
2. Remove the one nut attaching the headphone jack of
the power supply board on the front side of the body.
b
Power
supply
board
Headphone jack
Nut
Fig.18
3. Disconnect the card wire from connector CN402 on
the power supply board.
4. Remove the three screws O attaching the power
supply board and pull out the power supply board
from the front bracket backward.
5. Unsolder the three harnesses connected to the
power supply board.
Power supply
board
Headphone jack
O
CN402
O
Tie band
Hook
O
Tie band
Fig.19
1-8
Solder
RX-8010VBK
Removing the system control board /
power switch board (See Fig.20 to 22)
Operation switch panel
Front panel assembly
Nut
Prior to performing the following procedure, remove
the top cover and the front panel assembly.
1. Pull out the volume knob on the front side of the front
panel and remove the nut attaching the system
control board.
2. Remove the two screws P
switch board.
attaching the power
3. Remove the two screws Q
board.
attaching the switch
Volume knob
Fig.20
4. Remove the cords from the three hooks a.
5. Remove the eight screws R attaching the system
control board on the back of the front panel.
6. On the back of the front panel, release the four joints
by pushing the joint tabs inward.
Remove the operation switch panel toward the front.
Switch
board
R
R
Cords
Power switch
board
R
Q
P
7. Disconnect the harness from connector CN420 and
CN422 on the system control board.
8. Release the two hooks b attaching the system
control board.
Joint
Joint
Joint
Joint
Hook a
Fig.21
System control board
CN420
Hook b
Hook b
CN422
Fig.22
Matters that require attention during
replacement of IC400
In case where there is a resistance array:
Both onetime IC and mask IC can be used
In case where there is no resistance array:
Only mask IC can be used
Resistance array
1-9
RX-8010VBK
Adjustment method
Tuner section
1.Tuner range
FM
87.5MHz~108.0MHz
AM(MW)
530kHz~1710kHz
Power amplifier section
Adjustment of idling current
Measurement location
B2204-B2205(Lch) , B2213-2214(Rch)
Adjustment part
VR787(Lch) , VR788(Rch)
Attention
This adjustment does not obtain a correct adjustment value immediately after the amplifier is
used (state that an internal temperature has risen).
Please adjust immediately after using the amplifier after turning off the power supply of the
amplifier and falling an internal temperature.
<Adjustment method>
1.Set the volume control to minimum during this adjustment.(No signal & No load)
2.Set the surround mode OFF.
2.Turn VR787 and VR788 fully counterclockwise to warm up before adjustment.
If the heat sink is already warm from previous use the correct adjustment can not be made.
3.For L-ch,connect a DC voltmeter between B2204 and B2205 (Lch)
And,connect it between B2213 and B2214(Rch).
4.30 minutes later after power on, adjust VR787 for L-ch, or VR788 for R-ch so that the DC voltmeter
value has 1mV~10mV.
* It is not abnormal though the idling current might not become 0mA even if it is finished to turn variable
resistance (VR787,VR788) in the direction of counterclockwise.
Heat sink
B2213, B2214
VR788 (Rch)
VR787 (Lch)
B2204, B2205
1-10
RX-8010VBK
Self-diagnose function
1. Detection of abnormal power supply and voltage
When the power is turned ON, if an abnormality is detected during the signal input at the A/D port (IC901,
pin 2-5, 7) for one second continuously, the status will become STANDBY mode immediately.
When the power is turned ON again, detection of abnormal power supply and voltage will not be carried out
during the first 4 seconds.
Given below is a list of threshold values at the detection of abnormalities.
Pin 2
Micro-computer+5V
Pin 3
Digital+5V
Pin 4
Analog+5V
Pin 5
+12V
Pin 7
Tuner+9V
At abnormal state
(Low voltage)
Analog value
0 - 2.2V
Analog value
0 - 2.2V
Analog value
0 - 2.2V
Analog value
0 - 2.2V
Analog value
0 - 2.2V
At abnormal state
Analog value
2.2 - 2.8V
Analog value
2.2 - 2.8V
Analog value
2.2 - 2.8V
Analog value
2.2 - 2.8V
Analog value
2.2 - 2.8V
At abnormal state
(High voltage)
Analog value
2.8 - 5.0V
Analog value
2.8 - 5.0V
Analog value
2.8 - 5.0V
Analog value
2.8 - 5.0V
Analog value
2.8 - 5.0V
2. Initial setting on ship
To gain the initial setting on ship, put the power plug in the socket while pressing DOWN key and UP key
together simultaneously, then turn the power ON.
3. Test mode
To enter the test mode, put the power plug in the socket while pressing EFFECT key and UP key together
simultaneously, then turn the power ON.
Workings of test mode:
All FLs are turned ON for 3 seconds. (the FLs, which are divided in two groups, are turned ON alternatively)
A Faster volume UP/DOWN operation can be achieved with the remote controller.
When the power is turned OFF, the test mode will be released.
The FL display returns to normal after the three seconds. Then the STANDBY LED is turned ON (flashing
ON and OFF for each one second) to show the present status being a test mode.
1-11
RX-8010VBK
4. Self-diagnose
To enter the self-diagnose mode, put the power plug in the socket while pressing SETTING key and UP key
together simultaneously, then turn the power ON. With the UP/DOWN key operation, DSP microcomputer,
ROM No.of system microcomputer as well as working status of DSP can be displayed for five seconds.
While the working status is being displayed, the followings items can be switched with the UP/DOWN key
operation.
VERSION of system microcomputer
Local microcomputer CH0
Local microcomputer CH01
Local microcomputer CH2
Local microcomputer CH3
Local microcomputer CH4
When the power is turned OFF, the self-diagnose mode will be released.
During the self-diagnose mode, the STANDBY LED is turned ON .
(flashing ON for one second then OFF for three seconds)
FL transient display will be carried out as follows. When the transient display is not carried out,
normal display/workings are carried out.
Upper 1 2 3 4 5 digits
Lower 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 digits
FL Display
S 0 0 1 1
2 0 0 0 1 2 0 9 0 0
Information on VERSION of system microcomputer (IC901)
Example : VER1.1 2000/12/9
D 0 0
Display of communication information on DSP microcomputer (IC581)
D 0 1
Display of communication information on DIR AK4112A (IC551)
D 0 2
Display of communication information on DSP XCA56367 (IC501)
D 0 3
Display of communication information on CODEC AK4527 (IC571)
D 0 4 1 1
2 0 0 0 1 2 0 9 0 0
1-12
Information on VERSION of DSP microcomputer (IC581)
Example :VER1.1 2000/12/9
RX-8010VBK
Description of major ICs
AK4527 (IC571) : A/D,D/A Converter
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
LOOP1
LOOP0/SDA/CDTI
DIF1/SCL/CCLK
DIF0/CSN
P/S
MCLK
DZF1
AVSS
AVDD
VREFH
VCOM
1.Pin layout
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
VREFL
RIN+
RINLIN+
LINROUT1
LOUT1
ROUT2
LOUT2
ROUT3
LOUT3
DEM1
DEM0
MCKO
DVDD
DVSS
PD
XTS
ICKS1
ICKS0
CAD1
CAD0
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
SDOS
OCKS
MIS
BCLK
LRCK
SDTI1
SDTI2
SDTI3
SDTO
DAUX
DFS
2.Block diagram
LIN+
LIN-
ADC
HPF
RIN+
RIN-
ADC
HPF
Audio
I/F
LRCK
LOUT1
LPF
DAC
DATT
BICK
DAUX
MCLK
ROUT1
LPF
DAC
DATT
LOUT2
LPF
DAC
DATT
ROUT2
LPF
DAC
DATT
SDOUT
Format
Converter
SDOS
SDTO
LOUT3
LPF
DAC
DATT
SDTI1
SDIN1
SDIN2
ROUT3
LPF
DAC
DATT
SDIN3
SDTI2
SDTI3
Block Diagram (DIR and AC-3) DSP are external parts)
1-13
RX-8010VBK
3. Pin function (1/2)
1-14
AK4527(1/2)
No.
1
Pin name
SDOS
2
OCKS
I
3
MIS
I
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
BICK
LRCK
SDTI1
SDTI2
SDTI3
SDTO
DAUX
DFS
I
I/O
I
I
I
O
I
I
12
DEM1
I
13
DEM0
I
14
15
16
17
MCKO
DVDD
DVSS
PD
O
I
18
XTS
I
19
20
21
ICKS1
ICKS0
CAD1
I
I
I
22
CAD0
I
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
LOUT3
ROUT3
LOUT2
ROUT2
LOUT1
ROUT1
LINLIN+
RINRIN+
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
I
I
I
I/O
I
Function
SDTO Source select pin
"L" : Internal ADC output, "H" : DAUX input
ORed with serial control register if P/S="L".
MCKO Clock frequency select pin
"L" : MCLK, "H" : MCLK/2. ORed with serial control register if P/S= "L".
Connect to GND
Audio serial data clock pin
Input/Output channel clock pin
DAC1 Audio serial data input pin
DAC2 Audio serial data input pin
DAC3 Audio serial data input pin
Audio serial data output pin
AUX Audio serial data input pin
Double speed sampling mode pin
"L" : Normal speed, "H" : Double speed, the ADC is powered down.
ORed with serial control register if P/S="L".
De-emphasis pin
ORed with serial control register if P/S="L"
De-emphasis Pin
ORed with serial control register if P/S="L"
Master clock output pin
Digital power supply pin
Digital ground pin
Power-down & Reset pin
When "L", the AK4527 is powered-down and the control registers are reset
to default state. If the state of CAD0-1 changes, then the AK4527
must be reset by PDN.
X'tal oscillator Select/Test mode pin
"H" : X'tal Oscillator selected
"L" : External clock source selected
Input clock select 1 pin
Input clock select 0 pin
Chip address pin
Used during the serial control mode.
Chip address pin
Used during the serial control mode.
Lch #3 analog output pin
Rch #3 analog output pin
Lch #2 analog output pin
Rch #2 analog output pin
Lch #2 analog output pin
Rch #1 analog output pin
Lch analog negative Input Pin
Lch analog positive Input Pin
Rch analog negative Input Pin
Rch analog positive Input Pin
RX-8010VBK
3.Pin function (2/2)
AK4527(2/2)
No.
33
34
Pin Name
VREFL
VCOM
I/O
I
O
35
36
37
38
39
VREFH
AVDD
AVSS
XTI
XTO
MCKI
P/S
I
I
O
I
I
43
DIF0
CS
DIF1
CCLK
LOOP0
I
I
I
I
I
44
CDTI
LOOP1
I
I
CDTO
O
40
41
42
Function
Negative voltage reference Input pin, AVSS
Common voltage output pin,AVDD/2
Large external capacitor around 2.2uF is used to reduce power-supply noise
Positive voltage reference input pin,AVDD
Analog power supply pin
Analog ground pin
X'tal input pin
X'tal output pin if XTS="H"
External master clock input pin if XTS="L"
Parallel/Serial select pin
"L" : Serial control mode, "H" : Parallel control mode
Audio data interface format pin in parallel mode
Chip select pin in serial mode
Audio data interface format pin in parallel mode
Control data clock pin in serial mode
Loop back mode pin in parallel mode
Enables digital loop-back from ADC to 3 DACs.
Control data input pin in serial mode
Loop back mode pin in parallel mode
Enable all 3 DAC channels to be input from SDTII.
Control data output pin in serial mode
1-15
RX-8010VBK
BA15218F(IC303, IC304, IC372, IC385, IC386) : OP AMP.
OUT1 1
-IN1 2
8 VCC
7 OUT2
1
+IN1 3
+
-
6 -IN2
+
5 +IN2
2
VEE 4
BA7625 (IC201, IC242) : Video selector
MONITOR OUT 1
16 IN1
GND 2
15 CTL A
14 VOUT 1
IN5 3
logic
GND 4
13 VCC
IN4 5
12 IN2
11 CTL B
CTL E 6
logic
IN3 7
10 VOUT 2
CTL D 8
11 CTL C
A
B
E
MONITOR OUT
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
*
*
*
L
H
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
C
D
E
VOUT1
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
*
*
*
L
H
-IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
C
D
E
VOUT2
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
*
*
*
L
H
IN1
-IN3
IN4
IN5
A
B
E
MONITOR OUT
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
*
*
*
L
H
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
C
D
E
VOUT1
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
*
*
*
L
H
-IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
C
D
E
VOUT2
L
H
L
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
*
*
*
IN1
-IN3
IN4
IN5
BA7626 (IC241) : Video selector
MONITOR OUT 1
16 IN1
GND 2
15 CTL A
14 VOUT 1
IN5 3
logic
GND 4
13 VCC
IN4 5
12 IN2
11 CTL B
CTL E 6
logic
IN3 7
CTL D 8
1-16
10 VOUT 2
11 CTL C
L
H
RX-8010VBK
BU2092(IC402):PORT EXPANDER
1.Terminal Layout
1
18
Vdd
DATA 2
17
OE
16
Q11
15
Q10
14
Q9
13
Q8
12
Q7
11
Q6
10
Q5
Vss
CLOCK 3
Q0
5
Q1
6
Q2
7
Q3
8
Q4
9
12BIT SHIFT RESISTER
4
12BIT STRAGE RESISTER
LCK
OUTPUT BUFFER(OPEN DRAIN)
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
2.Pin Function
Pin No.
Symbol
I/O
Function
1
Vss
-
Connect to GND
2
DATA
I
Serial Data input
3
CLOCK
I
Shift Clock of Data
4
LCK
I
Latch Clock of Data
5~16
Q0~Q11
O
Parallel Data Output
Latch Data L
H
OUTPUT ON OFF
17
OE
I
Output Enable
18
Vdd
-
Power Supply
1-17
RX-8010VBK
MB90088 (IC203) : On screen display controller
1.Terminal Layout
YIN
VIN
CIN
AVcc
IOUT
VOC
Vcc
EXS
XS
HSYNC
VSYNC
EXHSYN
EXVSYN
Vss
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
AVss
YOUT
VOUT
COUT
CS
SIN
SCLK
TEST
BOUT
ROUT
GOUT
VOB
XD
EXD
2.Block Diagram
SIN
SCLK
CS
EXHSYN
EXVSYN
Serial Input
Control
Each Control, Data
H/V Separate
VIN
YIN
CIN
HSYNC
VSYNC
Analog SW
NTSC/PAL
Signal OSC
Video Signal
OSC
Display Memory
Control
Output
Control
VRAM
XS
EXS
XD
EXD
1-18
VOUT
YOUT
COUT
CGROM
4FSC CLK
OSC
Each Block
Dot CLK
OSC
Each Block
BOUT
ROUT
GOUT
IOUT
VOC
VOB
RX-8010VBK
3.Functions
pin
Function
no Symbol I/O
1 YIN
I Lux signal Input terminal for Superinpause indication
2
VIN
I
Composite video signal input terminal for Superinpause indication
3
CIN
I
Contrast signal input terminal for Superinpause indication
4
AVcc
-
Analog power supply terminal
5
IOUT
O Color (Lux) signal output terminal
6
VOC
O Character output terminal
7
Vcc
8
EXS
I
9
XS
Power supply terminal
Clock generater outside circuit terminal for color burst
O
O Horizontal signal output terminal
O Vertical signal output terminal
10
HSYNC
11
VSYNC
12
EXHSYN I
EXT horizontal signal input terminal
13
EXT vertical signal input terminal
14
EXVSYN I
Vss
-
15
EXD
I
Dot clock generater outside circuit signal terminal for indication
16
XD
O
17
VOB
18
GOUT
O Character & background signal output terminal
O Color signal (Green, Red, Blue)
19
ROUT
GND
20
BOUT
21
TEST
I
Test signal input terminal
22
SCLK
I
Shift clock input terminal for serial transmission
23
SIN
I
Serial data input terminal
24
CS
I
Chip select terminal
25
COUT
26
VOUT
O Contrast signal output terminal
O Composite video signal output terminal
27
YOUT
O Lux signal output terminal
28
AVss
-
Analog GND terminal
1-19
RX-8010VBK
MAX4018ESD (IC390) : OP AMP.
ENA
1
16
OUTC
ENC
2
15
INC-
ENB
3
14
INC+
Vcc
4
13
VEE
INA+
5
12
INB+
INA-
6
11
INB-
OUTA
7
10
OUTB
N.C.
8
9
N.C.
NJM2285V-W(IC202) : 2-INPUT 3CHANNEL VIDEO SWITCH
IN1A
GND1
16
15
IN2B
14
V+
13
CTL2
IN2A
12
11
H
10
IN3B
9
L
CLAMP TYPE
BIAS TYPE
L
GND3
H
CLAMP TYPE
L
H
1-20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IN1B
CTL1
OUT1
GND2
OUT2
OUT3
CTL3
IN3A
RX-8010VBK
NJM4580D (IC301) : LPF, Mic and H.phone Amp.
1.Terminal layout
A OUT
1
A -IN
2
A
8
V+
7
B OUT
B
A +IN
3
6
B -IN
V-
4
5
B +IN
(TOP VIEW)
2.Block diagram
V
+
INPUT
+
OUTPUT
V-
NJU7241F33(IC411) : VOLTAGE REGULATOR
1
5
2
3
PIN FUNCTION
1. GND
2. VIN
3. VOUT
4. +NC
5. STB
4
1-21
RX-8010VBK
PCM2702E-X (IC410) : DIGITAL / ANALOG CONVERTER
3 DGNDC
AGNDP 26
4 VDD
VccL 25
5 DGND
AGNDL 24
6 D+
VOUTL 23
7 D-
USB packet
data
D+
DVBUS
DGNDU
WRCLK
audio
data
FIFO
USB I/F
8x
Oversampling
Digital Filter
Multi-level
Delta-Sigma
Modulator
Vcc 22
8 VBUS
AGND 20
10 PLYBCK
VOUTR 19
11 SSPND
AGNDR 18
12 ZERO
VccR 17
13 TEST3
TEST0 16
14 TEST2
TEST1 15
DAC
Low-pass
Filter
DAC
Low-pass
Filter
RDCLK
VDDC
DGNDC
USB clock
generator
SPACT
System Clock
Audio clock
generator
Crystal OSC
XTI
XTO
Power supply
VDDP DGNDP
VCC
AGND
VDD DGND
3.Pin function
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Symbol
XTI
VDDC
DGNDC
VDD
DGND
D+
DVBUS
DGNDU
PLYBCK
SSPND
ZERO
TEST3
TEST2
TEST1
TEST0
VccR
AGNDR
VOUTR
AGND
VCOM
Vcc
VOUTL
AGNDL
VccL
AGNDP
VccP
XTO
I/O
IN
I/O
I/O
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
Function
Crystal Oscillator Input.
Digital Power Supply for Clock Generator, +3.3V.
Digital Ground for Clock Generator.
Digital Power Supply, +3.3V.
Digital Ground.
USB Differential Input/Output Plus.
USB Differential Input/Output Minus.
USB Bus Power (This pin NEVER consumes the USB bus power).
Digital Ground for USB Transceiver.
Playback flag, active LOW. (LOW: playback, HIGH: idle).
Suspend flag, active LOW. (LOW: suspend, HIGH: operational).
Zero flag, (LOW: Normal, HIGH: ZERO).
Test pin 3. Connect to digital ground.
Test pin 2. Connect to digital ground.
Test pin 1. Connect to digital ground.
Test pin 0. Connect to digital ground.
Analog Supply for R-channel, +5V.
Analog Ground for R-channel.
Analog Output for R-channel.
Analog Ground.
Common for DAC.
Analog Supply, +5V.
Analog output for L-channel.
Analog Ground for L-channel.
Analog Supply for L-channel, +5V.
Analog Ground for PLL.
Analog Supply for PLL, +5V.
Crystal Oscillator Output.
Note:
(1) 3.3V tolerant.
(2) Schmitt trigger input with internal pull-down, 5V tolerant.
1-22
VOUTL
VCOM
MCLK
VCOM 21
9 DGND
VccR
AGNDR
VccL
AGNDL
VccP 27
ZERO
XTO 28
2 VDDC
PLYBCK
1 XTI
SSPDN
2. Block diagram
1.Pin layout
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
VOUTR
RX-8010VBK
TC9162AN (IC380) : ANALOG SWITCH
VSS
L-S1
L-S2
L-COM1
L-S3
L-S4
L-COM2
L-S5
L-S6
L-COM3
L-S7
L-COM4
ST
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
VDD
R-S1
R-S2
R-COM1
R-S3
R-S4
R-COM2
R-S5
R-S6
R-COM3
R-S7
R-COM4
DATA
CK
VSS
1
GND
14
VDD
28
L-S1 2
27 R-S1
L-S2 3
26 R-S2
25 R-COM1
L-COM1 4
24 R-S3
LEVEL SHIFTER
L-S5 8
LATCH CIRCUIT
L-COM2 7
LATCH CIRCUIT
L-S4 6
LEVEL SHIFTER
L-S3 5
23 R-S4
22 R-COM2
21 R-S5
20 R-S6
L-S6 9
19 R-COM3
L-COM3 10
18 R-S7
L-S7 11
17 R-COM4
L-COM4 12
16 DATA
ST 13
SHIFT REGISTER
15 CK
1-23
RX-8010VBK
TC9163AF-X (IC371) : ANALOG SWITCH
VSS
L-S1
L-S2
L-S3
L-COM1
L-S4
L-S5
L-S6
L-COM2
L-S7
L-S8
L-COM3
ST
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
VDD
R-S1
R-S2
R-S3
R-COM1
R-S4
R-S5
R-S6
R-COM2
R-S7
R-S8
R-COM3
DATA
CK
VSS
1
GND
14
VDD
28
3
26 R-S2
L-S3
4
25 R-S3
L-COM1
5
24 R-COM1
L-S4
6
L-S5
7
L-S6
8
L-COM2
9
23 R-S4
22 R-S5
21 R-S6
20 R-COM2
L-S7 10
19 R-S7
L-S8 11
18 R-S8
L-COM3 12
17 R-COM3
ST 13
16 DATA
SHIFT REGISTER
1-24
LEVEL SHIFTER
L-S2
LATCH CIRCUIT
27 R-S1
LATCH CIRCUIT
2
LEVEL SHIFTER
L-S1
15 CK
RX-8010VBK
TC9164AF-X (IC302) : ANALOG SWITCH
VSS
L-S1
L-S2
L-S3
L-S4
L-COM1
L-S5
L-S6
L-COM2
L-S7
L-S8
L-COM3
ST
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
VDD
R-S1
R-S2
R-S3
R-S4
R-COM1
R-S5
R-S6
R-COM2
R-S7
R-S8
R-COM3
DATA
CK
VSS
1
GND
14
VDD
28
3
26 R-S2
L-S3
4
25 R-S3
L-S4
5
24 R-S4
L-COM1
6
L-S5
7
L-S6
8
L-COM2
9
LEVEL SHIFTER
L-S2
LATCH CIRCUIT
27 R-S1
LATCH CIRCUIT
2
LEVEL SHIFTER
L-S1
23 R-COM1
22 R-S5
21 R-S6
20 R-COM2
L-S7 10
19 R-S7
L-S8 11
18 R-S8
17 R-COM3
L-COM3 12
16 DATA
ST 13
SHIFT REGISTER
15 CK
1-25
RX-8010VBK
TC9459F (IC381, IC382, IC383) : Electronic volume control
2. Block diagram
1.Terminal layout
VSS
L-OUT
NC
L-IN
L-LD1
L-LD2
L-A-GND
NC
CS1
NC
GND
CK
L-ch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
VDD
R-OUT
NC
R-IN
R-LD1
R-LD2
R-A-GND
NC
CS2
NC
STB
DATA
L-OUT
2
NC
3
L-1N
4
R-ch
L-LD1
VSS
VDD
1
24
23 R-OUT
22 NC
50k /
915TEP
VR
21 R-IN
Same as L-ch
5
20 R-LD1
Circuit
L-LD2
6
19 R-LD2
L-A-GND
7
18 R-A-GND
NC
8
17 NC
L-ch 7 to 91
decoder
L-ch data
latch circuit
R-ch 7 to 91
decoder
R-ch data
latch circuit
Shift register (24BIT)
Level shift circuit
CS1
9
NC
10
15 NC
GND
11
14 STB
CK
12
13 DATA
16 CS2
3.Pin function
Pin No.
1-26
Symbol
Function
Pin No.
Symbol
Function
1
VSS
Negative power supply pin
13
DATA
Data input pin
2
L-OUT
Volume output pin
14
STB
Strobe input pin
3
NC
No connection
15
NC
No connection
4
NC
No connection
16
CS2
Chip select input pin
5
L-LD1
Loudness tap output pin
17
NC
No connection
6
L-LD2
Loudness tap output pin
18
R-A-GND
Analog GND pin
7
L-A-GND
Analog GND pin
19
R-LD2
Loudness tap output pin
8
NC
No connection
20
R-LD1
Loudness tap output pin
9
CS1
Chip select input pin
21
R-IN
Volume input pin
10
NC
No connection
22
NC
No connection
11
NC
No connection
23
R-OUT
Volume output pin
12
CK
Clock input pin
24
VDD
Positive power supply pin
RX-8010VBK
PQ3DZ53 (IC583) : Regulator IC
DC INPUT(Vin)
1
3
DC OUTPUT(Vo)
2
ON/OFF CONTROL(Vc)
CUSTOM IC
5
GND
TC74HC4053AF (IC388, IC389) : MULTIPLEXER
1Y 1
16
Vcc
0Y 2
15
Y-COM
IZ 3
14
X-COM
Z-COM 4
13
1X
0Z 5
12
0X
INH 6
11
A
VEE 7
10
B
GND 8
9
C
CONTROL INPUTS
INHIBIT C
B
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
L
L
H
H
L
H
H
L
H
X
H
X
A
K
H
K
H
K
H
K
H
X
X: Don't Care.
W24L010AJ-12 (IC511) : CMOS STATIC RAM
1. Pin layout
2. Block diaglam
VDD
NC
A11
A9
A8
A13
WE
CS2
A15
VDD
NC
A16
A14
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
32
VDD
Vss
A16
2
31
A15
A14
3
30
CS2
A12
4
29
WE
A7
5
28
A13
A6
6
27
A8
A5
7
26
A9
A4
8
25
A11
CS2
A3
9
24
OE
CS1
A2
10
23
A10
OE
A1
11
22
CS1
WE
A0
12
21
I/O8
I/O1
13
20
I/O7
I/O2
14
19
I/O6
I/O3
15
18
I/O5
Vss
16
17
I/O4
32-pin
TSOP
A0
DECODER
CORE
ARRAY
CONTROL
DATA I/O
A16
I/O1
I/O8
3. Pin function
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
19
18
17
16
OE
A10
CS1
I/O8
I/O7
I/O6
I/O5
I/O4
Vss
DO3
DO2
DO1
A0
A1
A2
A3
SYMBOL
A0 - A16
I/O1 - I/O8
CS1, CS2
WE
OE
VDD
Vss
NC
DESCRIPTION
Address Input
Data Input/Output
Chip Select Inputs
Write Enable Input
Output Enable Input
Power Supply
Ground
No Connection
1-27
RX-8010VBK
UPD784215AGC132(IC581) : UNIT CPU
1.Pin layout
75
~
51
76
50
~
~
100
1
~
25
26
2.Pin function
Pin No.
1~8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19~22
23
24
25~32
33
34,35
36
37,38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45,46
47
48
49
50,51
52
53
54
55
56
57~63
64,65
66
67
68~70
71
72
73~75
76
77
78
79,80
81
82,83
84
85
86
87
88
89~93
94
95~100
1-28
Symbol
VDD
X2
X1
VSS
XT2
XT1
RESET
AUTO
ERR
Fz96k
P03~P06
AVDD
AV REF0
P10~P17
AVSS
P130, P131
AV REF1
RX, TX
DSPCOM
DSPSTS
DSPCLK
DSPRDY
MIDIO_IN/OUT
MICK
HREQ
SS
DSP_RST
D_CS
PD/ DIR
CDTI/CDTO
CCLK
CS
PD
GND
EQ
CTR TONE
3D
VDD
ANA_TT
LEF_MIX
LEF_OUT
MIX_OUT
S_MUTE
TEST
I/O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
O
O
I
O
I
I
O
I/O
O
I
O
O
O
O
O/I
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
Function
Non connect
Power supply terminal
Connecting the crystal oscillator for system main clock
Connecting the crystal oscillator for system main clock
Connect to GND
Connecting the crystal oscillator for system sub clock
Connect VSS
System reset signal input
Output of DSP to general-purpose port
Output of DSP to general-purpose port
Output of DSP to general-purpose port
Output of DSP to general-purpose port
Power supply terminal
Connect to GND
Connect to GND
Connect to GND
Non connect
Power supply terminal
Not use
Non connect
Communication port from IC901
Status communication port to IC901
Clock input from IC901
Ready signal input from IC901
Non connect
Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer
Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer of clock signal
HREQ
System slave select
Non connect
Reset signal output of DSP
Non connect
Chip setselct output
Non connect
Reset signal output
Non connect
Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer
Interface I/O terminal with microcomputer of clock signal
CS
Non connect
Reset signal output
Connect to GND
Non connect
EQ
CENTER TONE
3D-Phonic
Non connect
Power supply
Non connect
Analog./T.TONE
Select 1
Select 2
Select 3
S.MUTE
Non connect
Test terminal
Non connect
RX-8010VBK
Block diagrams
CN406
SYSTEM CONTROL
& FL
COMP LINK
TEXT LINK
Main section
LVA10221-1
CN732
CENTER
CN823
CN813
CN702
CN703
CN824
CN814
REAR L
RL ch
Q1852
Q1854
CN881
Q1851
Q1853
RR ch
CN400
FW881
REAR R
CN406
SYSTEM CONTROL
& FL
CN101
SR
RY852
LVA1024-2
LVA10009
CEN
RY851
CN723
CN351
CN111
Q1751
Q1752
LVA10219-1
CN361
CN301
DATA
CN311
CEN
SL
LVA10219-3
2
CN701
SL/SR
IC383
CN721
CN416
SPK2
R
DVD REAR
AUDIO
CN381
CN371
V SIG
CPU
IC901
CN303
LVA10223
CN313
R
RY833
CN722
3
L
RY832
SL/SR
CEN
CEN
IC381
MON
MON
CN501
CEN
CN581
SPK1
L
IC380
SW
CN587
L/R
SL/SR
CN601
DATA
LVA10219-4
CN705
CN206
Q762
Q764
R ch
CN706
CN204
L
RY831
R
CN715
CN200
L/R
4
CN205
CN201
LVA10219-5
IC382
CN242
CN240
CN241
LVA10222-1
CN244
L/R
CN243
L ch
CN711
LVA10221-2
Q761
Q763
CN712
CN731
CN713
5
CN716
Signal I/O block section
A
SYSTEM
CONTROL
& FL
CN410
1
B
C
D
E
F
G
2-1
RX-8010VBK
Video section
Video input section
LVA10219-3
LVA10219-4
5
P
MON Y/C IN
DATA/CLK
VCR1 REC
SOUTCE
SELECTOR
IC 371
CN204
SW
IC 201
VCR1
MON Y/C OUT
Y/C SEP
IC 202
R
TV/DBS
CN311
DATA
IC 203
VCR1 P.B
V SIG
V SIG
R
CN351
TV/DBS
DVD F
CN200
DVD
VCR2 REC
VCR2
P
VCR2 P.B
CN206
FRONT VIDEO
IN
(RCA)
USB
MON
CN416
4
FRONT AUDIO
DSP section
LVA10223
S Video section
3
SELECTOR
IC 551
CN240
DIGITAL
IN3
DSP
CONTROLLER
IC 581
AD/DA
CONVERTER
IC 571
R/L
C
SR/SL
CN581
DVD
DIGITAL
IN2
C
IC 241
SW
(C)
DATA
DIGITAL
IN1
DATA
CN587
LVA10219-5
DIGITAL
IN4
TV/DBS
R
FRONT Y/C
VCR1
DSP
IC 501
CN244
2
SD RAM
IC 511
DIGITAL
OUT
P
R
VCR2
Y
P
IC 242
SW
(Y)
MON
Y
MON Y/C
MON Y/C
CN242
C
1
A
B
C
2-2
D
E
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
Tuner section
System control & FL section
LVA10009
LVA10218-1
FM
AM/FM DET
IC102
MW RF & OSC
T111
PLL
IC102
FL DISPLAY D400
DATA
CN410
AM
CN111
TUNER
5
TUNER
RF 101
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
IC 400
KEY
4
Y/C
Audio input section
PHONO
L/R
EQ
IC 301
CN406
VIDEO
AUDIO
LVA10219-2
USB
CD
L/R
DATA/CLK
TUNER
TAPE
P.B
2
TAPE
REC
CN311
3
SOURCE
SELECTOR
IC 302
CDR
P.B
AUDIO
CN351
V SIG
IC 303
CDR
REC
1
DVD
REAR
A
IC 304
B
DVD REAR
C
D
E
F
G
2-3
RX-8010VBK
Standard schematic diagrams
Power supply section
RY62
RY63
QSK0088-001 QSK0088-001
5
CN811
D67
1SS133
PW10
131
PW20
132
PW11
113
PW17
PW12
112
111
PW13
123
4
F61
122
PW14
121
F62
PW15
134
R61
CN55
C69
0.047MY
PW40
PW30
TA1
TA2
C1
0.0047
T2
QQT0281-005
1SS133
C54
470/16
C45
0.0047
R53
6.8
C44
470/16
D46
MTZ6.2JB
D71
1SR35-400A
D72
1SR35-400A
Q42
KTD863/Y/
Q52
KTD863/Y/
R44
C52
1000/25
1000/35
KRC105M
D56
MTZ6.2JA
R72 3.3k
22/50
C73
R73
22K
CN491
PW19
D57
TH71
QAD0095-4R7
C71
100/63
D75
MTZ8.2JC
Q74
KTC3200/GL/
C74
1/50
2
D53
1SR35-400A
D73
C70
1SR35-400A 220/50
Q71
KTA1046/Y/
sheet 3/11
PW29
F1
Q53
RY1
QSK0098-001
820
3300/35
C66
C51
0.0047/100
R54
820
D63
10E2-FD
C65
CN71
CN82
PW18
R1
3.3M
C55
0.0047
C63
0.1MY
Q61
KRC105M
C62
0.1MY
1SR35-400A
100K
1SR35-400A
D62
D54
1SR35-400A D52
D61
10E2-FD
C61
0.1MY
R67 12
C68
0.047MY
R74
CN72
PW28
FW51
D51
1SR35-400A
3
PW26
CN56
D64
CN402
PW16
133
1SR35-400A
sheet 10/11
3.3
D74
C72
MTZ33JC 22/50
EP51
1
SHEET
NUMBER
1/11
2/11
3/11
4/11
5/11
6/11
7/11
8/11
9/11
10/11
11/11
A
CIRUIT DISCRIPTION
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
POWER SUPPLY
MAIN
AUDIO
AUDIO SIGNAL INPUT
VIDEO SIGNAL INPUT
AUDIO AMP (FRONT CHANNEL)
AUDIO AMP (CENTER, REAR CHANNEL)
DSP
DVD
SYSTEM CONTROL
TUNER
SHEET 1/11
B
C
2-4
D
E
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
sheet 6/11
sheet 7/11
sheet 8/11
sheet 6/11
sheet 8/11
R831
12
C833
0.022
sheet 7/11
C841 220P
sheet 8/11
C845
220p
Main & Speaker terminal section
R833
10
C835
0.022
C842 220P
CN706
0.022
CN723
10
CN705
R834 C836
5
CN702
CN721
C834
0.022
D831
1SS133
RY831
CN701
CN703
C846
220P
C847
220P
0.022
C837
0.022
C839
0.022
C838
ST831
C840
0.022
C848
220P
C844
R838
10
220P
D832
1SS133
RY832
12
C843 220P
R837
10
R832
CN823
CN813
R835
12
4
D835
12
R816
3.3k
C801
R815
RY833
D816
MTZ18JC
1SS133
C816
47/25
D801
R801
100K
C891
220P
D804
R844
100K
C885
0.022
30DF2-FC
R845
82K
ST851
C892
220P
C887
0.022
C884
0.022
220P
D852
RY871
QSK0109-001
C888
0.022
C889
R887
10
C883
0.022
4.7/50
D842
1SS133
4.7/50
R860
6.8K
C851
C852
4.7/50
C853
CN881
3.9K
R855
CN831
Q830
KRC109M
R857
6.8K
1SS133
D844
1SS133
Q832
KRC109M
D841
MTZ5.1JC
22K
D843
22K
Q831
KRC109M
R863
6.8K
R858
4.7K
C850
4.7/50
R856
R862
22K
D825
Q823
KTC3199/GL/
47/16
R824
130K
Q825
KTA1268/GL/
C823
R864
4.7K
2
R859
S831
1SS133
100K
47k
R813
C893
220P
R861
4.7K
Q824
KTC3200/GL/
R823
10K
D871
1SS133
C824
R814
10k
Q812
KTC3200/GL/
R826
R825
10K
D811
R871
12
10/25
RY852
1SS133
12
R812
3.3K
C811
0.0047
R888
10
R852
Q811
2SD2395/EF/
R811
C890
3
220P
100K
C886
82K
R843
D802
30DF2-FC
C881
0.022
220P
R842
R885
10
R802
100K
C808
CN824
D851
CN814
R841 100K
1SS133
12
RY851
C807
R851
C802
6800/71
CN801
6800/71
D803
30DF2-FC
C805
sheet 1/11
30DF2-FC
FW881
R865
4.7K
D845
1SS133
FRONT Signal
sheet 3/11
R91
R92
CENTER Signal
REAR Signal
R866
4.7K
470
J91
470
FW931
C92
470P
C91
470P
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
R867
10K
D846
1SS133
Q833
KRC109M
Q834
KRC109M
Q836
Q835
KRC109M
KRC109M
1
SHEET 2/11
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
2-5
RX-8010VBK
Audio section
R916
8.2
R915
8.2
R961
12
R951
12
C952
0.0047
C972
0.0047
R941
33
Q941
2SD2395/EF/
Q961
KTA1046/Y/
C942
0.0047
C962
0.0047
C971
100/25
C951
100/25
D971
MTZ10JC
C921
100/25
R943
2.7K
D941
MTZ5.6JC
R917
10
R932
43
33
C941
100/25
D961
MTZ13JC
C932
0.0047
R922
33
C961
100/25
R953
2.2K
R931
43
Q931
2SD2395/EF/
C931
100/25
R923
2.7K
D921
MTZ5.6JC
R933
2.7K
D931
MTZ6.2JC
D902
1SR35-400A
D951
MTZ13JC
C922
0.0047
R942
R963
2.2K
R973
3.3K
R921
33
Q921
2SD2395/EF/
D900
1SR35-400A
Q951
2SD2395/EF/
D901
R971
12
Q971
2SD2395/EF/
1SR35-400A
5
Q908
KRC105M
CN81
4
D905
1SS133
4/8_OUT
C984
330P
C981
330P
C982
330P
C983
330P
EP901
Q903
KRC105M
Q904
KRC105M
Q905
KRC105M
Q906
KRC105M
1.5
C902
sheet 10/11
SUB_RELAY
C_RELAY
S_MUTE
DSPRESET
DSPCOMMAND
DSPSTATUS
DSPCLK
DSPREADY
SW_MUTE
4/8_OUT
TUNER_CK
TUNER_CE
RDS_DATA
RDS_CLK
TUNER_DATA
PROTECT
4/8_IN
M_BUSY
TUNED
STEREO
RDS_ST
C905
0.022
TUNER_MUTE
SUR_RELAY
CN931
R930
10K
D904
1SS133
F2_RELAY
C904
2.2/50
CN241
CN601
sheet 5/11
R925 220
DSPCLK
DSPSTATUS R926 220
DSPCOMMAND R927 220
DSPREADY R928 220
DSPRESET R929 220
VCR1_S/C
VCR2_S/C
DVD_S/C
DBS_S/C
OSD_DAT
OSD_CLK
VIDEO5
VIDEO6
M_BUSY
M_RESET
STANDBY_LED
VCR_S/C
F1_RELAY
220
VIDEO2
VIDEO3
VIDEO4
OSD_CS
220
220
220
VIDEO1
D993
1SS133
4/8_IN
100P
VIDEO1
PROTECT
VIDEO6
VOL_STB
VIDEO4
VIDEO3
VIDEO2
C993
sheet 5/11
220
220
R985
R986
R987
MAIN_CLK
MAIN_STB
VOL_DAT
VOL_CLK
R936 220
RDS_DATA R935 220
RDS_CLK
CN201
R983
R984
M_COMMAND
M_STATUS
M_CS
Q907
KRC105M
330
100/6.3
R903
C901
8MHz
RDS_ST
R934
220
SUBV_STB
SUB_DAT
SUB_CLK
SUB_STB
MAIN_DAT
M_CS
R910
22k
R999
10K
CN102
C903
IC903
IC-PST9139
FL992
QQR0590-001
X901
R911
4.7K
22K
C991
0.0056
C992
0.0056
Q901
KRC107M
R991
4.7K
FL991
QQR0590-001
R908
2
sheet 11/11
R937 220
TUNER_DATA
TUNER_CE R938 220
TUNER_CK R939 220
TUNER_MUTE
TUNED
STEREO
IC901
MN101C49GHM
OSD_DAT
OSD_CS
OSD_CLK
M_COMMAND
M_STATUS
M_CLK
M_RESET
C975
470/6.3
R992
4.7K
CN101
C985
0.01
2200/6.3
R975
22
SUB_MUTE
S_MUTE
SW_MUTE
M_CLK
220
F1_RELAY
HP_RELAY
1SS133
C986
0.1
220
R982
SUR_RELAY
C_RELAY
F2_RELAY
D979
D978
D977
D975
D976
R995 13K
SUBV_STB
SUB_PRE
R980
R981
SUB_PRE
SUB_RELAY
R993 6.2K
sheet 4/11
sheet 2/11
CN400
VIDEO5
SUB_MUTE
R976 4.7K
R978 4.7K
R997 15K
HP_RELAY
10K
10K
R968
R969
10K
R965
STANDBY_LED
R924
10K
CN303
3
FW831
R998 5.6K
R977 4.7K
R956
R996 3.3K
220
220
220
R994 5.1K
R954
R955
R979 4.7K
VOL_CLK
VOL_DAT
DVD_S/C
VCR1_S/C
VCR2_S/C
DBS_S/C
VIDEO_S/C
R945 220
R946 220
R947 220
R948 220
R949 220
R966
R967
R944 220
R940
4.7
sheet 4/11
MAIN_STB
MAIN_CLK
MAIN_DAT
SUB_STB
SUB_CLK
SUB_DAT
-15V
+15V
VOL_STB
10K
10K
CN301
CN932
sheet 2/11
C994
270P
TUNER Signal
sheet 6/11
1
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
SHEET 3/11
A
B
C
2-6
D
E
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
Audio / V Audio signal input section
2.2k
470
C331
C332
220p
220p
47/16
R311
C315
100k
47/16
C316
100p
100k
100/10
R312
100/10
C314
C309
47k
C313
47k
100p
100p
C303
R303
100p
R345
100k
100k
100k
C344
10/50
C1202
22/25
C339
560p
R346
R343
100k
100k
R344
R341
R342
TUNER-R
100k
IC302
R332
470 CDR.PLAY-R
CD-L
R331
10/50
C342
IC303
BA15218F
10/50
J303
4
CDR.PLAY-L
SUB-R
CDR.REC-R
R1202
68
C1209
560p
TUNER-L
220p
470
PLAY-R
R330
470
CDR.PLAY-R
220p
CDR.REC-L
R328
470
SUB-L
R329
C330
PLAY-R
220p
220p
220p
CDR.PLAY-L
C328
220p
C329
CD-R
C327
C1201
22/25
J302
CD-L
R327
470
REC-R
PLAY-L
PLAY-L
C335
22/25
R326
470
C343
10/50
R1201
68
IC391
TC9164AF-X
C326
REC-R
C325
CD-R
CDR.REC-R
220p
R325
470
R335
68
R324
470
CDR.REC-L
220p
REC-L
IC303
BA15218F
C341
J301
REC-L
C324
R316
330
470
V.SIG.R
C323
470k
4.7/50
TUNER-R
R323
470
C312
0.0068MY
R310
TUNER-L
CD-L
4.7/50
4.7/50
470k
IC301
NJM4580DD
CDR.PLAY-R
220p
39k
V.SIG.L
220p
R334
0.0018MY C308
R308
PLAY-R
C322
620
R309
39k
CDR.PLAY-L
390p
C321
C306
CD-R
C334
0.0018MY C307 0.0068MY
R307
PLAY-L
C333
390p
470
C305
IC301
NJM4580DD
TC9164AF-X
R333
C302
C311
620
C310
R302
R305
R306
C304
5
R315
330
C301
4.7/50
R304
R301
2.2k
C336
22/25
R336
68
IC304
BA15218F
C361
DVD-LS
R365
100k
C363
4.7/50
R366
100k
C364
sheet 6/11
VOL_STB
VOL_CLK
VOL_DATA
CN311
QGB2510K1-14
TUNER-R
CN351
QGB1214K1-16S
TUNER-L
4.7/50
4.7/50
DVD-LS
DVD-RS
IC304
BA15218F
VOL_STB
VOL_CLK
VOL_DATA
DVD-RS
C362
V.SIG.L
V.SIG.R
100k
100k
100k
R361
R363
R362
100k
R364
4.7/50
sheet 3/11
3
R1229
100k
IC395
BA15218F
R379
470
VCR2.REC-L
R381
VCR2.PLAY-L
C378
220p
220p
C379
C380
220p
220p
C381
C382
220p
220p
C1261
C1262
220p
220p
J371
R378
R1251
10k
R1252
10k
Q1250
2SC3576-JVC-T
470
Q1248
2SC3576-JVC-T
1k
R1254
R1243
100k
470
R382
470
R1241
100k
R1242
100k
R1226
100k
1k
J372
C1227
4.7/50
47/25
IC395
BA15218F
C1245
22/50
C1242
4.7/50
10/50
R1228
68
C1224
10/50
IC394
BA15218F
C1228
4.7/50
C1226
47/25
R1231
1k
C1229
4.7/50
R1227
68
C1222
SUB-R
C1244
4.7/50
VCR1.PLAY-R
R380
C1223
10/50
R1225
100k
IC393
TC9459F
R1244
100k
R1250 10k
R1248
C1225
C1221
SUB-L
10/50
R1249 10k
470
VCR1.REC-R
C1243
4.7/50
1k
C1230
4.7/50
C1233
10/50
R1230
100k
R1232
470k
REAR.SIG.R
SUB-R
SUB.SIG.R
VIDEO-R
VCR2.PLAY-R
22/25
VCR1.PLAY-R
C1211
USB-R
R1211
68
V.SIG.R
VCR2.REC-R
VCR1.REC-R
VIDEO-R
VCR2.PLAY-R
VCR1.PLAY-R
USB-R
22/25
TV/DBS-R
C385
DVD.F-R
R385
68
REAR.AMP.R
R1262 470
DVD.F-R
470
Q1234
2SC3576-JVC-T
1k
J373
R1261
R1236
10k
R1234
1k
R1245 SUB.PRE
Q1245
KRA104M
Q1233
2SC3576-JVC-T
C1232
22/50
VCR2.REC-R
VCR2.PLAY-R
R1235
10k
SUB.MUTE
SUB.V.STB
SUB.DATA
220p
C377
R376
R1247
100k
C376
220p
470
TV/DBS-R
1k
2SC3576-JVC-T
Q1247
100k
C375
R374
2SC3576-JVC-T
Q1249
R1223
220p
DVD.F-R
R1224
C374
220p
R1253
470
TV/DBS-R
2
470
C373
R372
Q1231
KRA104M
SUB.CLK
470
R377
VCR1.PLAY-L
220p
100k
470
VCR1.REC-L
C372
R1221
R375
470
C371
220p
C1231
220p
100k
R373
TV/DBS-L
470
R1222
R371
DVD.F-L
R1233
1k
IC394
BA15218F
C1241
4.7/50
AUDIO Signal
R393
C395
120p
C397
10/50
B
REAR.AMP.L
REAR.SIG.L
SUB.SIG.L
VIDEO AUDIO Signal
sheet 6/11
C
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
SUB.V.STB
SUB.PRE
SUB.MUTE
S.MUTE
SW.MUTE
CN313
QGB2510K1-13
SUB.CLK
SUB.DATA
S.MUTE
SW.MUTE
REAR.SIG.L
REAR.SIG.R
REAR.AMP.L
REAR.AMP.R
470
R390
V.SIG.L
V.SIG.R
SUB-L
SUB-R
470
470
CN371
QGB1214K1-14S
sheet 10/11
A
PHONO Signal
C1219
560p
VIDEO-L
470
CN416
QGA2501F1-06
R388
R389
1
R387
VIDEO-R
R1212 68
SUB-L
10k
22/25
VIDEO-L
C1212
R386
68
VCR2.PLAY-L
560p
VCR1.PLAY-L
C396
120p
C389
USB-L
22/25
TV/DBS-L
C386
DVD.F-L
USB-R
V.SIG.L
5.1k
R394
R398
100k
C398
10/50
VCR2.REC-L
5.1k
R396
VCR1.REC-L
10/50
R392
VIDEO-L
IC372
BA15218F
C394
1200p
C392
TUNER Signal
USB-L
R397
100k
VCR2.PLAY-L
IC372
BA15218F
IC392
TC9163AF-X
VCR1.PLAY-L
5.1k
C393
1200p
IC371
TC9163AF-X
USB-L
10k
R395
TV/DBS-L
R391
5.1k
DVD.F-L
C391
10/50
SHEET 4/11
sheet 2/11
D
E
F
G
2-7
RX-8010VBK
Video / S video signal input section
5
R253
R254
R255
CN200
QGB2510K1-11
2.2
R225
C276
R274
MB90088
15p
C271
100P
C220
C257
47/16
C256
0.01
BA7625
75
75
C277
4.7/50
C251
R247
0.047
75
R271
47p
27p
0.001
270p
120p
C222
C223
C224
C225
C210
4.7/50
C221
22u
Q241
KTA1267/YG
C260 0.047
C255
L200
10k
4.7/50
75
C270
100P
47k
C252
470/6.3
C261
R268
R283
XD
EXD
Q203
KRC107M
R218
330
3.3
R269
10p
3
10k
R282
150
150
R250
R248
IC242
R275
R276
300
300
Q202
KRC110M
C274
470/6.3
150
R281
R216
C272
0.047
47k
C258
0.01
C259
47/16
C219
150
R214
Q201
KTA1267/YG
75
YOUT
VOUT
COUT
CS
SIN
SCLK
150
Q200
KTA1267/YG
R272
75
C273
0.047
47P
R273
X200
470/6.3
10k
47k
R217
R213
J243
C275
47P
R215
75
C226
47P
0.047
C206
C207
4.7/50
R251
150
R221
100
R220
150
C216
4.7/50
75
R206
1SS133
75
75
R246
4.7/50
IC203
330
1SS133
R245
47k
R212
D241
C247
470/6.3
C250
470/6.3
R211
D240
C268 47P
C217
470/10
C205
R204
IC241 BA7626
47k
150
4.7/50
J202
J203
R266
4.7/50
C214
C218
IN3 VOUT2
D
75
R205
560
560
560
C215
OUT1 IN2B
OUT2
OUT3
CTL3
IN3A IN3B
IN2
C204
R244
75
1.5
IN4
330
C246
0.047
sheet 3/11
Q246
KRC110M
C249
0.047
R267
470/6.3
47k
R210
75
C269
47P
J242
IN1B
Q244
KRC107M
Q242
KTA1267/YG
75
C245
4.7/50
Q207
KTA1267/YG
R249
R209
R203
C212
47/16
C213
0.01
IC202
NJM2285V-W
Q240
KTA1267/YG
R243
75
Q205
KTA1267/YG
4
4.7/50
R242 75
4.7/50
C203
R202
75
MOUT IN1
A
IN5 VOUT1
sheet 3/11
R222
R223
R224
IC201
BA7625
4.7/50
75
Q206
KTA1267/YG
330
R201
Q204
KTA1267/YG
J201
C202
R219
R208
1SS133
75
1SS133
C231
4.7/50
C244
0.047
R231
2.2k
300
C211
100/50
C201
C242
4.7/50
R280
0.01
D201
330
R200
R241 75
OSDCS
OSDDATA
OSDCLK
47/16
D200
R207
0.047
C254
0.047
C209
CN240
QGB2510K1-12
C241
R240 75
J241
C208
15k
15k
15k
Q245
KRC110M
Q243
KTA1267/YG
Q247
KRC107M
sheet 10/11
CN204
QGB1214K1-08S
sheet 6/11
VIDE0C
CN206
QGA2501F1-02
VIDEOY
VIDEO
C253
10p
CN242
QGB1214K1-10S
CN244
QGA2501F1-04
sheet 10/11
sheet 6/11
2
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
1
SHEET 5/11
A
B
C
2-8
D
E
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
VIDEO5
VIDEO6
R1293
1.6k
R1294
4.7k
DCS
TEXT
AV_VCR
YOSD
DVD section
220p
C1354
J1390
R1397
5.6
100/10V
R1398
1k
100
R1373
220
R1374
220
47/25
0.01
C1377
47P
R1380 75
C1384
47/25
R1381 75
C1385
4.7/50
C1387
C1386
4.7/50
C1388
47P
R1383 75
C1390
47/25
J1380
C1389
47P
R1382 75
C1380
47/25
C1383
47P
R1379 75
47P
220p
J1371
IC389 TC74HC4053AF
R1372
R1394
27k
C1371
R1384 75
C1391
4.7/50
C1392
4.7/50
D1370
100/10
R1281
4.7k
C1393
IC390
MAX4018ESD
R1282
4.7k
R1284
C1394
100P
R1388 47k
C1396
470/6.3
1.1k
R1283
1k
100P
C1395
R1389 47k
100P
75
C1281
R1399
1.5k
R1387
MA3062/H/-X
75
220
R1386
R1375
J1372
75
Q1392
KTA1273/Y/-T
R1385
FW481
QUM134-10DGZ4
IC387
NJM2406F-X
C1372
R1392
39k
Q1391
KRA107M
R1391
39k C1351
1000p
C1378
C1353
0.1u
5
0.01
220p
R1396
10k
IC388 TC74HC4053AF
R1395
100k
C1382
47P
220
47/25
R1393
100k
D1392
1SS133
C1381
470
C1375
D1391
1SS133
J1370
R1371
C1376
CN480
QJK017-031301
100/10
C1370
R1370
C1352
R1390 47k
C1397
100/10
C1398
100/10
C1282
470/10
R1312
100k
C1283
47/25
C1314
4.7/50
C1312
4.7/50
CN243
QGB1214J1-10S
Yin
VOL_STB
VOL_DATA
C1284
100/10
C1285
VOL_CLK
47/25
R1289
4.7k
IC390
MAX4018ESD
R1290
4.7k
R1292
1.1k
R1291
1k
C1286
100/10
R1311
100k
DSP_IN_R
R1315
10k
DATA
C1307
22/16
R1308
470k
R1323
1k
REAR.SIG.R
R1330 0
10/50
C1338
10/50
IC384
BA15218F
R1321
100k
CN732
WJP0026-001A
C1336
R1329 0
R1334
10k
100k
REAR.SIG.L
C1337
10/50
100k
Q1333
2SC3576-JVC-T
R1336
1k
S.MUTE
R1337
R1335
10k
Q1334
2SC3576-JVC-T
IC384
BA15218F
C1335
10/50
R1339
VOL_STB
VOL_DATA
C1325
0.22/50
REAR.SIG.L
REAR.SIG.R
REAR.AMP.L
REAR.AMP.R
C1321
4.7/50
C1323
4.7/50
C1306
47/25
CN381
QGB1214J1-14S
V.SIG.L
V.SIG.R
SUB-L
SUB-R
VOL_CLK
IC382
TC9459F
Q1323
2SC3576-JVC-T
R1340
R1324
10k
C1329
220p
100k
C1308
10/50
100k
C1324
4.7/50
C1322
4.7/50
C1326
0.22/50
CCH
R1338
R1322
100k
R1333
1k
sheet 4/11
sheet 2/11
Q1314
2SC3576-JVC-T
R1316
1k
STB
C1303
220p
DSP_IN_L
R1303 1.2k
DVD-C
DSP.C
DSP.LS
DVD-LS
DSP.L
R1302
68
C1302
47/25
FRONT-L
DSP.L
DSP.R
DSP.LS
DSP.RS
DSP.C
DSP.SW
R1306
68
2
SIG.L
R1314
10k
Q1307
KRA104M
IC380
TC9162AN
DSP_IN_L
DSP_IN_R
sheet 9/11
Q1313
2SC3576-JVC-T
SIG.R
R1307
1k
S.MUTE
CLK
R1304 1.2k
DVD-SW
DSP.SW
DVD-RS
DSP.RS
DSP.R
R1301
68
C1301
47/25
FRONT-R
R1313
1k
Ymoni
VIDEO5
VIDEO6
CN501
QGB1214J1-12S
3
CN731
QJP001-032301
C1316
0.22/50
C1315
0.22/50
C1313
4.7/50
R1305
68
IC381
TC9459F
C1311
4.7/50
C1305
47/25
AV_VCR
DCS
TEXT
CN205
QGB1214J1-08S
Yin
YOSD
Cin
Cmoni
sheet 5/11
R1288
R1287
1k
C1319
220p
Ymoni
sheet 5/11
IC390
MAX4018ESD
R1286
4.7k
1.1k
Cin
Cmoni
4
R1285
4.7k
SIG.C
R1332
100k
C1334
4.7/50
REAR.AMP.R
C1339
220p
sheet 8/11
DSP_IN_L
IC383
TC9459F
R1351
68
FRONT-R
R1356
2.2k
C1333
4.7/50
R1358
3.9k
DSP_IN_R
VOL_STB
VOL_DATA
FRONT-L
C1344 47/25
IC385
BA15218F
VOL_CLK
R1355
2.2k
R1357
3.9k
C1331
4.7/50
sheet 4/11
FRONT-L
FRONT-R
DVD-LS
DVD-RS
STB
CLK
DATA
VOL_STB
VOL_CLK
VOL_DATA
REAR.AMP.L
C1332
4.7/50
CN361
QGB1214J1-16S
V.SIG.L
V.SIG.R
SUB-L
SUB-R
AUDIO Signal
R1350
68
R1331
100k
C1343 47/25
R1362
560
R1368
C1366
C1364
4.7/50
4.7/50
R1341
100k
CENTER Signal
R1343
18k
1k
R1344
R1346
10k
FRONT Signal
C1341 4.7/50
R1342
10k
100k
R1348
470
100k
100k
R1366
100k
R1364
C1362
390P
J1360
470k
Q1343
KRA104M
R1349
390P
C1345
100k
4.7/50
470
IC385
C1342 BA15218F
R1345
Q1341
2SC3576-JVC-T
DVD-C
Q1342
2SC3576-JVC-T
C1365
R1367
R1365
4.7/50
R1347
J1340
100k
R1363
IC386
BA15218F
C1363
100k
1
390P
C1361
R1361
560
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
DVD-SW
4.7/50
IC386
BA15218F
REAR Signal
SHEET 6/11
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
2-9
RX-8010VBK
Audio amplifier section (1/2)
Q771
KTC3200/GL/
R771
390
R779
0.22( 7W)
C795
0.022
Q773
KTA1268/GL/
R781
390
L791
1
R793
10
R797
15K
D773
1SS133
R715
100K
R763
10
R711
620
C707
100/16
R795
1K
R777
200
R773
390
D791
C719
0.0047MY
Q781
2SD637( Q.R)
R789
470
Q763
C791
0.047
C793
0.047
C753
47P
C741
47/100
390
R729
Q711
KTC3200/GL/
33K
R703
100K
R727
C703
100P
390
R709
9.1K
R731
Q703
2SC2240-BL/AB
D703
R723
1SS133 390
Q701
2SC2240-BL/AB
10P
C709
R783
620
TH783
QAD0012-202
Q709
KTA1268/GL/
R725
1.5K
Q705
KTA1268/GL/
R717
5.6K
C717
22P( 500V)
C715
68P
C705
100P
R787
47K
Q791
KTA1268/GL/
R791
33
C713
68P
R719
10K
R701 C701
2.2K 10/35
Q761
R775
200
VR787
500
D701
1SS133
C751
47P
D771
1SS133
Q707
KTA1268/GL
R733
220
C711
0.01
5
R761
10
1SS133
R707
2K
R721
150
R705
2K
C745
47/100
4
CN711
sheet 2/11
3
R762
10
R722
150
Q762
Q772
KTC3200/GL/
KTA1268/GL/
R764
10
R712
620
C708
100/16
R794
10
Q764
C792
0.047
C794
0.047
FRONT Signal
C754
47P
C742
47/100
R730
D774
1SS133
R716
100K
L792
1
R798
15K
C720
0.0047MY
Q782
2SD637( Q.R)
R796
1K
R778
200
R774
390
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
C746
47/100
390
R728
Q712
KTC3200/GL/
33K
C796
0.022
D792
C718
22P( 500V)
390
R732
Q704
2SC2240-BL/AB
D704 R724
1SS133 390
R704
100K
R784
620
R782
390
R710
9.1K
C704
100P
C710
10P
C706
100P
Q702
2SC2240-BL/AB
R780
0.22( 7W)
R790
470
TH784
QAD0012-202
Q710
R726
1.5K
Q706
KTA1268/GL/
C712
0.01
R734
220
R718
5.6K
R720
10K
R702 C702
2.2K 10/35
R772
390
R792
33
C714
68P
C716
68P
Q792
KTA1268/GL/
R776
200
VR788
500
D702
1SS133
R788
47K
D772
1SS133
Q708
KTA1268/GL
2
C752
47P
1SS133
R708
2K
Q774
KTA1268/GL/
R706
2K
1
CN712
sheet 2/11
A
B
C
2-10
D
E
SHEET 7/11
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
Audio amplifier section (2/2)
R1721
220
C1713
2.2/50
R1703
2k
C1703
100P
Q1701
2SC2240( A,B)
CN722
R1731
1K
R1723
3.3k
C1705
5P
Q1772
KTA1268/GL/
C1701
1/50
Q1702
2SC2240( A,B)
R1701
2.2K
R1722
3.3k
R1712
56K
Q1751
2SD2390/OPY/-F6
C1715
47/50
R1711
330
R1705
12K
R1724
3.3k
C1704
100/16
R1702
68K
C1702
100P
R1795
47K
C1741
47/100
D1771
1SS133
Q1771
KTC3200/GL/
D1701
1SS133
Q1731
2SD637( Q,R)
C1712
0.01MY
R1732
390
C1711
33P
TH731
QAD0012-202
5
C1751
47P
R1751
10
Q1703
KTA1268/GL/
R1771
Q1791
KTA1268/GL/
390
R1773
200
R1753
0.22
R1774
200
C1791
0.022
R1791
1K
R1772
L1761
0.45u
390
D1772
1SS133
Q1752
2SB1560/OPY/-F6
R1761
33
R1762
10
R1793
18K
CENTER Signal
C1761
0.047
R1752
10
D1791
1SS133
C1762
0.047
C1752
47p
R1725
3.3k
REAR Signal
C1743
47/100
R1741
220
4
Parts are safety assurance parts.
When replacing those parts make
sure to use the specified one.
CN713
sheet 2/11
R1821
220
Q1801
2SC2240( A,B)
C1809
5P
C1817
47/50
R1811
330
R1809
12K
C1803
R1803
68K
R1877
200
R1873
C1891
0.022
R1802 C1802
1/50
2.2K
C1806
100P
Q1802
2SC2240( A,B)
R1891
1K
L1861
0.45u
390
Q1853
2SB1560/OPY/-F6
R1814
56K
R1861
33
R1863
10
R1810
12K
C1861
0.047
C1853
47p
R1829
3.3k
R1832
1K
R1826
3.3k
C1810
5P
C1818
47/50
R1812
330
R1893
18K
D1891
1SS133
R1824
3.3k
C1804
C1863
0.047
R1804
68K
C1808
100/16
R1872
R1896
47K
C1842
47/100
Q1892
KTA1268/GL/
390
R1876
200
R1856
0.22
R1878
200
R1874
C1892
0.022
R1892
1K
Q1854
2SB1560/OPY/-F6
R1862
33
R1864
10
L1862
0.45u
390
D1874
1SS133
R1828
3.3k
R1894
18K
C1862
0.047
R1854
10
D1892
1SS133
C1864
0.047
C1854
47p
R1830
3.3k
C1843
47/100
Q1852
2SD2390/OPY/-F6
D1872
1SS133
Q1872
KTC3200Y/GR
R1855
0.22
R1853
10
2
D1802
1SS133
Q1891
KTA1268/GL/
390
C1814
0.01MY
Q1832
2SD637( Q,R)
R1871
R1875
200
D1873
1SS133
R1827
3.3k
C1807
100/16
Q1871
KTC3200Y/GR
R1831
1K
Q1831
2SD637( Q,R)
R1825
3.3k
C1812
33P
Q1874
KTA1268/GL/
C1805
100P
R1823
3.3k
Q1851
2SD2390/OPY/-F6
C1841
47/100
D1871
1SS133
Q1873
KTA1268/GL/
R1801 C1801
1/50
2.2K
Q1803
2SC2240( A,B)
R1813
56K
R1833
390
D1801
1SS133
C1813
0.01MY
TH831
QAD0012-202
C1811
33P
C1852
47P
R1852
10
Q1806
KTA1268/GL/
R1895
47K
R1834
390
R1851
10
Q1805
KTA1268/GL/
R1822
220
C1816
2.2/50
R1806
2k
C1851
47P
Q1804
2SC2240( A,B)
C1815
2.2/50
R1805
2k
TH832
QAD0012-202
3
C1844
47/100
R1841
220
R1842
220
CN715
CN716
sheet 2/11
sheet 2/11
1
SHEET 8/11
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
2-11
RX-8010VBK
DSP section
R2560 220
C2013
33P
C2009
0.1
C2019 0.1
R2024
C2707
0.1
R2433
82K
LOUT3
IC529
BA15218F
C2440
0.1
IC528 22K
BA15218F
C2442
0.1
Q2164
2SD1328/ST
R2159
11k
IC528
BA15218F
R2157
100K
R2134
10K
R2131
100K
C2134
0.022
R2127
C2107
4.7/25
C2137
4.7/25
R2105
1K
C2133
0.022
R2133
1k
SUBWFR
C2101
0.01
R2129
22K
C2136
10/16
Q2101
2SD1328/ST
R2107
100K
2
R2427
100K
R2582
R2583
R2584
R2585
R2586
22K
R2181
TEST
Q2151
DTA114YE
R2182
A1
C2512
A5
A4
A3
A2
C2513
A9
A8
A7
A6
R2612
TPPB13
TPHA9
TPHA8
TPHAS
TPHAD7
TPHAD6
TPHAD5
C2535
100/4
C2534
0.1
C579
100P
Q570
DTC114YE
Q2152
DTA114YE
1M
R2611
Tx
Rx
IC581
uPD784215AGC132
C2158 33P
1M
4.3K DSPREADY
4.3K DSPCLK
4.3K DSPCOMMAND
C2187
2.2/50
C2189
33P
R2158 30k
CN588
R574
R575
R576
ROUT3
R2137
10K
R2189
220 SS
220 HREQ
220 SCK
220 MOSI
220 MISO
R2187
100K
IC529
BA15218F
C2157
2.2/50
220
C2427
1/50
R2429
10K
Q2431
2SD1328/ST
C2441
0.1
10K
C2533
0.1
8.2K
8.2K
R2407
100K
DSP_RST
8.2K
C2439
0.1
Q2163
2SD1328/ST
Q572
DTC114YE
R579
R578
10K
R2597
1K
220
IC582
TC7SET32FU
C2433
33P
LC503
NQR0322-001
IC503
TC7S04FU
220 D_CS
2.2K
R2136
Q2157
DTA114YE
220 %PD/DIR%
R2425
10K
R2581
R2130
100k
Q2165
2SD1328/ST
C2138
4.7/25
R580
C2401
0.001
C2407
1/50
R2132
10K
SCK
R2589
33P
LC502
NQR0322-001
C2505
Q2156
DTA114YE
C2354
R2135
R2405
1K
R2360
10K
DSPSTATUS
R2183
Q2154
DTA114YE
AUDIO Signal
10K
R582
Q2153
DTA114YE
R2485
1K
C2481
47/6.3
C571
R577
8.2K
R573
4.3K
CENTER Signal
IC583
PQ3DZ53
C581
10/16
C582
10/16
C583
47/6.3
C587
0.1
CN581
QGB1214K3-12W
sheet 6/11
A
B
REAR Signal
C588
47/6.3
C584
0.1
C589 C590
0.1 100/4
D.GND
SUBWFR
C
SR
SL
R
L
RIN
LIN
A.-15V
A.+15V
A.+5V
X581
6.14MHz
1
RESET
DSPREADY
DSPCOMMAND
DSPSTATUS
DSPCLK
RESET
0.01
FRONT Signal
R570
10K
C577
100P
AUTO
ERR
FS96
1M
R2184
1M
WRITE
A13
A8
A9
A11
READ
A10
CE
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
IC505
PQ070XZ1HZ
C573
0.1
R2587
R2358 22K
C2523
0.1
ROUT2
220 C_CS
220 CCLK
220 CDTO
220 CDTI
R2352
11k
Q2155
DTA114YE
C2358
1/50
IC527
BA15218F
IC511
W24L010AJ-12
DSP_RST
R2364
100K
R2354 C2352
2.2K 1/50
A15
A16
A14
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D0
D1
D2
C2532
100/4
C2504
TPPB14
C2529
100/4
R2356 10k
IC526
BA15218F
C2308
1/50
R2128 C2135
22K 10/16
R2101
10K
R2502
C2509
C2350 0.1
C2514
C2516
47K
47K
R2702
R2701
Q2363
2SD1328/ST
C2348
33P
R2401
10K
220
220
R2363
100K
0.1
TPHAD4
Q2364
2SD1328/ST
R2306
1K
C
LOUT2
C2356
1/50
R2355
10k
R2350
30K
Q2401
2SD1328/ST
C2357
1/50
R2591
220
SR
R2359
10K
IC527
BA15218F
R2519
R2308
100K
2.2K
IC526
BA15218F
R2302
10K
Q2302
2SD1328/ST
0.1
C2351
TPHAD2
TPHAD3
220
C2302
0.001
R2353
TPHAD0
TPHAD1
C2506
MOSI
MISO
R2520
R2515
C2355
R2351
11k
30K
R2503
R2517
10K
LRCK
R2307
100K
22k
R2593
R2594
R2595
R2596
3
C2301
0.001
33P
R2357
R2186
1M
Q2301
2SD1328/ST
C2307
1/50
C2353
TPTDO
TPTDI
TPTCK
TPTMS
C2536
0.1
C2507
C2501
0.01
SCKB
SS
HREQ
D/A0
D/A1
D/A2
R2305
1K
R2301
10K
C2258
2.2/50
10k
R2514
10K
R2613
47k
R2614 TPMODD
47K TPMODC
R2615
47K TPMODB
R2616 TPMODA
47K
C2284
33P
R2349
SL
X2501
12.5MHz
C2508
TP607
R2276
6.8k
1M
C2510
C2521
220
0.1
R2258
100K
R2516
C2502
33P
C2349
C2706
0.1
R2274
10K
R2284
R2264
10K
IC501
XCA56367PV150
C2503
ROUT1
R2286
11k
R2501
C2705
0.1
R2518
IC525
BA15218F
IC524
BA15218F
C2262
4.7/25
C2230
4.7/25
C2347
C2704
47/6.3
R2257
100K
Q2274
2SD1328/ST
EP561
E409182-001SM
R2505
C2703
47/6.3
R2511
R2512
R2513
10K
33K
R2236
33K
IC571
AK4527BVQ
10k
10k
R2234
68K
C2238
33P
C2712
0.1
C2519
R2275
6.8k
R2273
10K
J564
IC502
TC7S04FU
READ
WRITE
10k
R2222 33K
C2208
1/50
R2221 33K
1K
LOUT1
Q2273
2SD1328/ST
R2262
100K
K2606
NQR0269-004
CE
C2518
CDTO
CDTI
CCLK
C_CS
R2523
R2522
R2521
R2238
R2206
C2257
2.2/50
C2256
0.1
C2254
0.1
RX4
C2511
IC525
BA15218F
R2171 1M
R
R2232
33K
R2208
100K
R2261
100K
R2573 5.1K
220
A0
LC501
NQR0322-001
0.001
IC523
BA15218F
0.1
R2715
4.3K
C2701
220P
C2202
C2255
R2431
R2202
10K
Q2202
2SD1328/ST
10k
R2277
1M
IC523
BA15218F
R2283
IC524
BA15218F
C2261
4.7/25
R2231
33K
R2207
100K
C2252
0.1
0.001
R2285
11k
0.1
R2225
100K
R2227
100K
C2201
C2253
R2233
33K
68K
R2226
100K
R2201
10K
Q2201
2SD1328/ST
R2237
C2251
0.1
C2283
R2278 1M
C2207
R2205 1/50
1K
L
R2263
10k
R2235
33K
TP_RX4
UN563
GP1FA550RZ
R2563 1.1K
R2504
RIN-
330
C2563
0.1
TP_RX3
RX3
UN562
GP1FA550RZ
C2522
0.01
C2014 33P
C2237
33P
AUTO
R2572 5.1K
K2607
NQR0269-004
D7
33P
R2553
C2557
33P
C2562
0.1
C2605 0.1
C2702
220P
C2006 120P
220
C2710
47/6.3
R2008 10K
4
RIN+
330
R2014 22K
R2716
R2717
R2023
IC522
BA15218F
R2012
22K
47K
R2006
10K
R2709
R2004
10K
R2172 1M
C2002
4.7/25
11k
RIN
R2010
10K
R2703
C2008
390P
IC521
BA15218F
R2571 5.1K
R2562 1.1K
R2568 C2568
220 1.0/50
LOUT3
ROUT3
LOUT2
ROUT2
LOUT1
ROUT1
LINLIN+
RINRIN+
C2004
0.0012
R2002
100K
C2515
A11
A10
R2017
4.7K
A14
A13
A12
R2018
4.7K
C2018
47/6.3
A16
A15
C2020 0.1
C2007
390P
0.1
BCK
C2010
R2557
R2555
R2554
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
LIN+
330
C2520
R2021
IC522
BA15218F
D2
D1
D0
C2003
0.0012
R2001
100K
R2013
22K
R2011
22K
DATA
R2009
10K
IC521
BA15218F
DAUX
BCK
220 DATA
LRCK
220 ERR
220 FS96
UN561
GP1FA550RZ
TP_RX2
RX2
R2559
220
R2551
18k
C2005
120P
R2005
10K
%PD/DIR%
C2517
R2003
10K
330
CDTO
CDTI
CCLK
D_CS
256FS
X2551
11.2896MHz
C2552
27P
LIN-
D6
D5
D4
D3
C2001
4.7/25
LIN
R2022
C2551
27P
R2561 1.1K
C2564
100P
R2007
10K
RX1
R2564 75
LC551
NQR0322-001
IC551
AK4112AVF
C2556
0.1
C2555
0.1
C2601
0.1
C2553
100/4
UN560
GP1FA550TZ
C2561
0.1
TP_RX1
DAUX
D/A2
D/A1
D/A0
LRCK
BCK
5
C2560
0.1
CN587
QGB1214K3-08W
SHEET 9/11
sheet 3/11
C
2-12
D
E
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
System control
& FL display section
C400
4.7/50
5
S36
S35
S34
S32
S31
S30
S29
S28
S27
S26
S25
S24
S23
S22
S21
S20
S19
S18
S17
S16
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S33
RA403
QRB059J-104
RA402
QRB169J-104
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
RA401
QRB169J-104
G6
G7
G8
G9
G10
G11
G12
G13
G14
G15
G16
G17
RA400
QRB169J-104
C409
4.7/50
C410
4.7/50
G17
Q403
VCRI
VCRO
DCSI
R457
G16
S16
R456
S15
R455
4
G15
C406
DTC114YKA
G14
S14
D405
DTC114YKA 1SS133
Q408
G17
S13
Q404
10k
470
DTC114TKA
10k
DTC114YKA
330p
Q407
G1
DTC144WKA
Q402
G13
G12
G11
G10
G9
G8
G7
G6
G5
G4
G3
G2
G1
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
CN412
QGF1205F1-08
S11
S12
DCSO
DI400
QLF0084-001
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
M_COMMAND
S24
IC400
S25
MN101CP35DHL1 (One time)
MN101C35DHL1 (Mask)
S26
M_CLK
M_STATUS
VCRI
DCSI
S27
C443
100/10
BASS_LED
S35
DIRECT_LED
S36
DSP_LED
VPP
M_RESET
LED_CLK
IC402
LED_LCK
R444
sheet 4/11
TV_DBS_LED
D416
SLR-342VC
VIDEO_LED
D417
SLR-342VC
VCR2_LED
D418
SLR-342VC
VCR1_LED
D419
SLR-342VC
DVD_MULTI_LED
D420
SLR-342VC
DVD_LED
D421
SLR-342VC
R463
220
M_RESET
R464
220
S429
B408
B402
B409
B403
DTA114YKA
220
Q412
DTA114YKA
330
R467
DTA114YKA BASS_LED
Q410
R465
R436
1k
R437
R438
R439
B407
B401
R440
B400
R442
R428
S428
R441
R431
1k
R424
1k
R425
1k
R426
1.2k
R427
B406
R429
R417
1k
R418
1k
R419
1.2k
R420
1.5k
B405
S427
S430
B404
R432
1k
S423
S426
S431
R433
1.2k
S422
S425
R434
1.5k
S416
S421
S424
R430
S415
S420
R421
2.2k
S414
S419
R422
2.7k
R410
1k
R411
1k
R400
1k
R403
1k
R404
1k
R405
1.2k
R412
1.2k
R413
1.5k
R414
2.2k
S413
S418
R435
2.2k
S409
S412
S417
R423
3.9k
S408
S411
R415
2.7k
S407
S410
R416
3.9k
S406
R406
1.5k
S405
R407
2.2k
S404
R408
2.7k
DTA114YKA
Q414
R469
220
SLR-342VC
D422
sheet 5/11
D423
R468
Q413
SURROUND_LED
220
DTA114YKA
47p
CN406
WJP0025-001A
S403
R409
3.9k
S402
DSP_LED
SLR-342VC
C465
C431
0.022
R401
1k
S401
R402
1.2k
75
S400
sheet 5/11
D415
SLR-342VC
Q411
R452
10k
470p
470p
C422
10k
R450
C421
10k
R449
470p
10k
R448
C463
47p
47p
75
D414
SLR-342VC
CD_LED
220
M_BUSY
BU2092
C430
0.022
R472
D413
SLR-342VC
PHONE_LED
220
R462
sheet 2/11
330
R443
1k
C420
10k
R447
10k
10k
R446
R451
10k
C462
220p
2
CDR_LED
0.022
1.5
R445
0.01
C461
220p
R471
D412
SLR-342VC
220
R461
M_CS
C404
C407
C412
100/6.3
C464
TAPE_LED
220
M_COMMANDR460
M_STATUS
LED_DATA
C440
C456
0.1
J400
D411
SLR-342VC
0.022
QAX0246-001Z
X400
R470
75
USB_LED
R466
CS2
CS1
KEY6
KEY5
KEY4
KEY3
KEY2
KEY1
LED_LCK
K456
NQR0201-018X
C460
C402
0.1
C401
0.1
D410
SLR-342VC
R459
C408
LED_DATA
10/16
C441
0.1
R458
10k
C438
22
C453 C454 C455
10P 10P 10P
3
DCSO
S34
FM_AM_LED
C442
100/10
C437
180
DIRECT_LED
22
S33
470p
R477
VCRO
C425
K453
K454
0.1
M_BUSY
S32
B410
22
S31
470p
0.1
R476
IC404
GP1U281X
M_CS
C424
C436
R475
K452
R479
JS400
QSW0898-001
S30
470p
NQR0201-018X
K451
RM
LED_CLK
R473
1.5k
0.1
0.1
C439
0.1
C435
J401
QNZ0503-001
22p
1M
PCM2702E-X
S29
C423
R474
IC410
C433
K455
22p
QAX0320-001Z
JOG1
SURROUND_LED
X410
NQR0201-018X
C432
S28
R454 10k
1k
CN410
QGF1205F1-10
M_CLK
S23
R478
R453 10k
IC411
NJU7241F33
CN422
QJK025-041201
S491
SLR-342VC
D491
D490
SLR-342VC
R490
2.7k
S490
R491
3.9k
D480
R481
2.2k
SLR-342VC
S482
S483
R482
2.7k
S481
R483
3.9k
S480
1
CN432
QGA2501C1-04
CN420
QJK025-031301
R480
1.5k
CN430
QGA2501C1-03
SHEET 10/11
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
2-13
RX-8010VBK
Tuner section
5
4
3
2
FM/TUNER Signal
1
AM Signal
CN101
SHEET 11/11
sheet 3/11
A
B
C
2-14
D
E
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
Printed curcuit boards
Main board
B521
5
B522
B523
CN491
B241
B524
CN72
B525
B526
B527
CN82
B528
B529
B530
B451
B453
R859
S831
B117
B452
B531
4
C833
C834
ST831
C839
C840
C883
R862
C884
C881
R860
ST851
B118
C853
R863
B119
C847
D844
C843
C886
C885
C848
C893
B116
R837
C846
C842
C838
B115
Q832
R861
C841
C835
R834
C836
R888
C845
B434
B433
R838
C888
C887
C892
C891
C844
B212
C889
B322
C890
B211
R833
C852
D843
B512
C837
R856
RY832
R887
R852
B511
B711
B712
Q831
R864
B113
B432
D852
R885
R857
D842
R802
R801
C851
D851
FW931
B435
RY833
B111
CN823
D835
B114
R832
D803
D802
D801
Q830
R858
R866
R865
D841
C802
C850
Q833
Q836
D846
3
D804
B120
R855
R867
B112
D831
R831
D832
R835
R851
RY831
Q835
RY851
CN824
B431
B321
RY852
B302
Q834
D845
C805
B303
D871
B501
B108
R871
CN831
C801
EP801
C808
CN801
RY871
CN881
CN813
CN814
B851
B760
B761
B305
B759
B755
B801
B802
B425
B803
CN721
CN723
2
B804
C807
CN703
R815
R817
B104
CN701
B751
B752
B103
B502
B430
B107
B429
B428
B805
D811
B852
B203
B301
B753
B758
B902
B307
B757
Q811
B421
B806
C823
B306
B703
B904
R812
C811
B754
B205
R811
R841
B101
B704
D816
R843
B201
R842
R844
B105
R818
C816
B426
R824
B701
B504
R845
C824
R826
R819
B106
Q824
Q825
B901
R816
CN705
B204
R825
D825
B756
CN706
R823
Q823
CN702
B309
B308
B423
B202
Q812
C820
R814
B102
R820
1
R813
B311
B312
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
2-15
RX-8010VBK
Micon board
FW51
PW28
131
RY1
D61
R66
C1
D63
C65
B3129
C63
C61
PW10
B3122
Q61
B3231
B3234
B3123
B3430
R55
B3232
B3233
D67
Q52
PW11
R54
CN71
B3333
B3332
C55
PW22
D56
PW12
C70
CN56
C54
12
VS1
B3236
D71
B3235
111
CN811
PW23
T2
PW13
PW27
13
112
RY62
FC4
10
CN55
PW29
Q53
TH71
B3334
11
113
PW40
B3124
C66
PW25
132
B3191
RY63
D57
D64
B3125
R67
D62
5
R61
B3120
B3230
B3121
C62
C71
Q71
D73
123
Q42
C72
R73
B3192
B3331
B3130
134
HS51
R51
B3335
B3336
B3337
R74
R53
Q51
FC64
FC63
FC2
D53
PW16
FC62
C51
B3126
C68
16
121
FC61
B3127
C69
CN402
FC1
PW30
C44
C53
D54
PW15
C74
B3238
D52
PW20
D51
PW17
C52
PW18
B3432
PW26
D46
B3431
PW14
133
B3128
B3203
D55
C901
R987
PW901
R911
R981
D904
R982
R980
C904
C905
B3104
EP51
B3103
B3301
R910
C982
R983
B3323
R936
HS971
B3102
B3101
R973
R971
CN101
R934
B3902
R938
C962
B3201
C952
HS951
Q951
D961
B3207
R954
B3208
R955
B3209
R956
B3202
B3306
B3403
B3240
B3241
B3242
CN201
B3109
B3110
B3305
C961
D951
C951
A
B
C
2-16
D
E
B3405
B3406
B3407
B3106
B3210
1
C972
B3135
B3205
C993
R992
R945
C992
R963
B3415
B3215
B3216
R917
R961
R951
B3213
B3217
B3131
FL992
B3414
B3319
B3219
R91
R946
R947
R948
R949
CN303
B3107
B3108
B3413
B3318
FW881
B3412
B3416
CN241
R926
R927
R928
C991
B3410
B3411
CN601
R929
J91
R92
R991
B3409
B3516
B3324
EP91
B3408
B3506
B3507
B3316
B3317
B3214
B3422
B3310
B3311
R925
C92
Q961
R944
B3309
B3218
C994
C91
C986
B3212
B3705
B3308
B3220
B3511
B3510
B3512
R940
R975
B3307
B3424
B3601
B3514
B3320
B3515
B3322
C931
R932
B3113
B3505
B3112
R915
Q903
Q904
Q905
Q906
Q907
D931
FL991
B3504
B3132
B3751
C932
PW911
B3343
Q931
R931
D971
C971
B3503
B3404
R933
R939
C975
B3502
B3418
R976
R978
B3321
CN81
R995
R993
B3111
CN301
B3114
R935
D993
B3501
R924
HS931
B3115
R908
R969
B3417
B3221
B3105
R968
R930
R967
D975
R997
B3702
C921
B3303
D921
R923
IC901
R966
D976
B3304
R922
C941
B3133
D941
R943
B3801
R979
R942
R965
D978
D977
R994
C922
R921
R941
CN931
2
R996
R977
B3901
B3508
CN932
C942
C984
R984
R903
B3704
R998
Q921
B3118
B3117
Q971
B3703
R937
B3421
B3211
C903
D979
Q941
C983
R999
B3116
D902
B3602
B3206
B3402
B3340
B3342
B3134
D901
B3341
D905
FW831
B3701
Q908
C985
B3204
HS921
D900
B3419
HS941
B3420
3
CN102
B3302
B3401
R985
X901
HS961
EP1
EP901
CN400
R52
Q901
TA2
TA1
C981
R986
IC903
C902
R1
R953
14
15
D75
PW19
122
D74
Q74
B3237
4
C45
FC6
FC5
PW21
D72
FC3
R44
R72
C73
PW24
F
G
H
RX-8010VBK
Front board
B1115
R424
B1313
C431
R472
C465
C441
C461
C442
C462
C453
B1214
R431
B1222
B408
B1306
C410
B407
B1401
R459
R461
C401
C402
R440
B400
R438
R441
R439
B1101
B1501
B1701
B1225
B1317
B1905
B1904
B1305
B406
B409
B1221
B1223
CN410
B1402
R454
R453
R442
B1241
R462
R460
JS400
B1220
B410
X400
B1203
B1202
R463
S422
R464
S421
CN422
B1106
R467
B1309
B1403
B1301
B1205
B1302
B1211
B1212
R422
B1217
B1208
B1248
B1304
B1243
R426
D416
B1224
C426
C424
C425
B1245
C423
R421
B1215
R416
B1601
B1407
B1603
B1409
B1308
R444
Q411
R466
B1210
B1405
B1404
B1502
B1605
R443
Q410
R465
B1218
D417
B1116
B1240
B1201
B1410
C422
B1249
C421
B1107
R412
B1604
C432
B1109
R414
Q412
B1219
B405
R437
B404
R436
R432
R433
B401
R434
B402
R435
R427
R479
C408
B1246
R429
C404
B1406
IC400
B1315
IC402
R458
B1110
B1312
R449
B1244
R450
R448
R447
R446
R428
B1314
R430
RA403
B1903
B1906
C409
S426
Q408
C407
C412
C400
D418
S416
R452
B1251
R445
C420
B1250
B1703
S405
S414
B1307
B1267
C406
R405
B1261
B1262
S425
B403
B1253
B1256
S403
S404
B1415
B1310
B1311
B1254
R404
D419
C436
B1252
B1414
S406
R413
D420
R475
S411
R406
S413
R409
R457
R410
S412
R473
C435
S407
B1505
S409
R408
R455
R456
D405
Q404
B1113
B1112
B1111
Q402
D410
D411
B1216
R407
D423
Q403
D412
B1408
D421
R403
R425
B1117
C443
B1265
S402
R468
B1412
K455
R469
CN420
D413
S408
IC410
B1413
S410
S424
S420
D415
B1204
R402
R401
S401
Q414
Q413
R400
B1120
R478
IC411
C463
C430
R470
C456
B1108
D414
C439
R474
X410
R485
R476
C433
C455
C460
B1238
R471
R411
S418
R420
B1102
C464
C438
C437
J400
S400
4
R418
S423
S417
B1104
K456
J401
B1264
S431
S415
S419
C440
B1103
D422
R423
R415
R477
C454
K451
R417
R419
R451
K452
B1235
K454
B1114
B1236
K453
CN406
5
B1118
IC404
S427
S429
S428
S430
B1902
RA400
B1227
RA402
B1255
B1228
Q407
RA401
DI400
CN412
D491
D480
S490
R491
S480
CN430
S491
D490
CN432
3
R490
R480
S481
R481
S482
S483
R482
R483
2
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
2-17
A
R1366
R1363
B
C1341
C
2-18
C1361
J1360
D
R1342
J1340
E
Q1342
C1362
R1343
C1381
C1382
R1379
R1380
C1383
R1381
J1380
F
J1370
R1370
R1374
R1292
R1291
C1285
R1392
C231
IC203
C220
C219
J202
CN480
D1391
D1370
R1373
J1372
G
R1395
C222
C221
R275
CN200
C217
C218
R276
J242
C225
X200
C224
C216
L200
C271
R269
R268
C277
C207
C209
C223
C276
C273
C226
C206
Q202
R273
C275
C270
IC390
R1399
Q1392
R255
R247
C251
C252
C272
Q242
R251
R250
Q243
Q240
Q246
Q244
R282
R280
R283
Q247
Q245
R281
CN240
IC242
R206
R213
R215
Q203
R217
R272
Q1391
R1294
R212
C208
Q201
CN206
R254
C249
C274
C250
R248
R249
R1244
R1397
IC389
IC387
R1293
R205
R214
R216
R244
R245
C205
R253
IC391
R204
J241
R274
R246
Q241
R284
R1396
R1393
C1281
R211
C204
R218
C247
R266
R267
R285
C1376
R210
C269
C246
C268
C244
R342
R344
R1201
R335
R336
R1202
R316
R315
C254
Q1231
R341
R343
C255
R1232
CN244
C1378
R1336
C1375
R203
C212
C211
C268
R241
R202
R209
Q200
C213
C1377
C1380
C202
C203
C329
R1289
CN242
C342
C258
C1371
C1283
R1285
R219
C245
C241
C242
CN311
R242
R1290
Q204
R220
C311
C1209
R1371
C1284
R1286
R208
R201
Q205
R243
R243
C305
C1201
C335
C1232
C1243
R387
C1372
R1348
R221
C307
R307
C1202
C336
C344
R1231
C1233
R1235
C1241
C260
R1372
R1346
C1386
R1287
R1282
R1284
R1281
J303
C1398
R1288
C1286
R1283
R1390
R1387
C201
Q206
R231
C1385
C1392
3
CN204
R312
C1395
Q1341
R1384
R1344
R207
C308
C315
R311
C1389
R1349
C1397
R1322
R200
R332
R331
R330
R329
C312
C330
R1386
IC382
C1391
R1389
C1282
R1334
C1394
IC385
C332
C331
R328
C316
C364
C1384
Q1343
R1383
R1365
Q1333
R1335
C328
C306
R308
R325
C313
R305
R303
C303
R1250
C1388
R1345
R1385
R1321
R1388
IC386
C1393
R1332
C1396
IC384
C1390
R1340
Q1334
R1329
R1324
R1337
C1335
J302
R1347
C1339
R1333
CN732
R310
R1338
CN731
R1330
C326
C1336
C327
R306
C310
R327
R326
R324
C363
R309
R1382
R1303
C324
C304
C339
C1387
C1329
IC301
C1342
CN501
R1306
C325
C1338
R1313
C309
C1343
R1302
R365
IC302
R1341
R1305
C1334
J301
R304
R364
C314
R363
R323
Q1247
C323
R362
R366
IC304
C1344
C1306
R346
C1333
R1315
C334
C301
R1245
C302
CN351
R395
R396
C322
C333
R302
R361
C362
R1242
C321
C378
R301
C361
C389
IC303
C1337
R334
R333
C1244
Q1234
R345
R1351
C1305
R1248
CN313
C1242
R1236
R1233
Q1233
C341
C343
R388
Q1323
R1316
Q1248
C1245
CN243
C1332
R1314
R1323
R1312
C1331
R1311
Q1245
CN205
C1319
Q1313
R381
Q1314
R1261
R1308
C382
R1252
Q1250
R1262
C1261
C1262
R1253
R1254
R397
R1234
C1228
C1308
R1247
R1249
R1251
Q1249
R382
IC371
R398
C395
C1307
IC392
C397
R1241
IC395
C1324
R1301
C396
C381
R394
IC372
CN416
R1243
C1323
R1304
C398
R1229
C1223
C1227
CN381
IC381
Q1307
C377
R1230
R380
C393
C1225
C1229
C1231
C1322
IC380
C394
R392
R393
R1357
C373
R379
C385
R1224
C380
C376
R378
C386
C391
C1226
C1230
C1221
R1221
R1227
C1321
2
R391
R389
R1355
R1307
C374
C379
C1219
R377
C392
R1228
CN361
R376
C1224
C1222
IC393
R1356
R1358
C372
R386
R1212
R1226
C1301
C1314
C1211
R1223
R375
R374
4
C1212
CN371
R1222
R390
C1326
C1302
C1313
C375
R373
R372
R371
R385
C1345
R1364
R1350
C1365
C1366
C1325
C1303
R1225
IC394
C1363
C1312
C1316
R1211
C1346
R1361
1
C1311
C1315
C371
C1364
R1367
5
R1362
R1368
RX-8010VBK
Input board (Reverse side)
C259
C253
C257
C261
C256
R271
D240
D241
IC241
J243
C210
C215
Q207
IC202
C214
R225
D200
IC201
R222
D201
R223
R224
R1339
J201
J203
R1331
IC383
IC388
FW481
D1392
R1394
R1391
C1351
C1354
C1353
C1352
R1398
C1370
J1371
R1375
J1390
H
A
J1390
J1372
J1371
B
Q1341
Q1342
Q1392
J1370
J1340
C
D
R1306
C1306
C1284
E
R1301
R1302
F
J373
J372
G
C1316
C1312
C1314
C1212
C1211
C385
R1212
R386
C392
C398
CN351
C336
CN313
C391
C397
C335
C1201
CN371
Q1234
C1222
C1224
C1226
C1228
C1242
C1244
C1230
C1225
C1221
C1223
C1229
C1232
C1241
Q1233
C1227
C1233
C344
C342
R316
R315
R1202
R336
R335
R1201
C1243
Q1231
C343
C341
C255
R1227
C1315
C1311
CN731
C1313
J301
C1301
Q1245
C386
C363
C1302
CN732
CN361
C361
C313
C1202
C261
Q1307
J302
C1307
Q207
C1326
J201
C1308
Q1313
C301
C364
C1325
CN381
J303
C362
C314
IC301
Q1314
C216
C302
4
C1322
Q1323
C315
C305
C260
C1321
C1324
CN205
C1332
CN206
C316
C306
C311
C307
CN311
CN242
C258
C1331
C1334
C1337
C1338
C312
C308
C242
C241
C256
C1323
CN243
C1333
C1335
Q206
C245
C254
C259
C1364
J1380
C1363
Q1343
R1351
C208
C1336
Q1334
Q1333
C215
R1350
C1354
C1344
C1283
C1341
C1285
CN501
J202
C1390
C212
C1396
IC201
CN204
J242
C1384
C1282
C213
Q205
Q241
Q240
Q245
IC242
C1391
D1391
C1397
C210
Q204
J243
C201
C247
Q243
Q247
CN240
D241
C1385
J203
C244
C274
Q242
Q244
Q246
IC241
C246
C250
C249
C273
C252
D240
C1286
C221
C272
CN244
C1342
C1353
C1392
Q200
C211
C218
C222
C251
R271
C202
C203
C204
C205
C217
CN200
C257
C1343
C1352
C1398
CN480
C1375
2
Q201
Q202
Q203
C220
C1376
C206
D200
C1380
D1392
C277
C1377
C1378
Q1391
C207
5
C1386
R1397
RX-8010VBK
Input board (Forward side)
R385
CN416
R1211
R1228
J241
C1245
Q1248
Q1247
Q1250
Q1249
C231
J371
R225
X200
C214
D201
C219
3
C209
R1305
C1305
FW481
C1281
IC380
C1365
C1366
J1360
1
2-19
C1854
R1854
C1814
R2261
C2253
C2255
R2017
C2553
C2568
J564
R1830
C2256
C2254
C2207
R2505
R2507
R2506
UN561
R2018
C2704
R2552
R2559
B2143
B2142
R1812
Q1874
R1878
D1874
R1894
D1892
R1826
B2762
R1842
B2761
C2556
R1856
Q1854
C2018
C2555
R2553
Q1806
CN581
C1892
R1892
R2551
C2557
C1812
C2251
R2207
R2205
C2201
R2277
R2257
R2503
Q1832
R1834
TH832
R1836
UN562
R1828
C2257
Q1852
C2252
R2208
R2206
C2202
R2258
R2278
C1804
R702
C704
R772
B2753
B2760
R1872
D772
Q762
C708
C752
R762
Q702
Q704
C2501
R2502
TPHAD5
TPHAD2
C2506
R2611
TPHA8
IC582
C573
TPHAD3
TPHAD6
TPHAS
TPHAD1
TPHAD4
TPHA9
TPHAD7
C1852
IC501
TPHAD0
R1852
R1804
C2509
Q1892
IC551
R2554
R2555
R2557
TPPB14
Q1804
C2349
R2307
C2301
C2350
R2308
C2302
R2364
R2363
IC526
C2358
C2357
C2707
C2523
IC503
R2519
R2518
R2515
R2520
R2516
R2522
R2521
R780
TH784
R790
R782
Q782
Q572
R2591
R1822
C583
C746
EP561
R2597
C2441
C2427
R2523
R2513
R2512
R2511
R2407
C2401
R778
B111
C712
D704
R706
R577
C577
R570
R730
B2605
B2606
R708
C2101
R2107
B2114
X581
C2136
C2442
R2129
C2187
C1752
R1752
R1722
R1723
C1795
C1715
R2133
Q708
R722
R726
R2135
C716
R774
Q712
C714
B2805
Q1731
R728
R732
C742
R788
R796
B2121
D1772
Q1772
B2422
D1791
TH731
R1732
Q710
B2112
R1733
B2124
C1743
Q1703
C1711
R1721
C1713
B2123
R1774
B2214
C1712
R1793
R784
R764
C754
Q1752
Q764
UN560
R718
R720
B2110
B2122
C1704
R1711
Q1701
R1705
Q1702
R1795
D774
Q774
R2431
R2187
IC529
C2439
C2440
IC528
R2427
R1791
C1791
B2607
R1702
C1702
C1701
Q1791
R582
R1802
C571
B2315
R2285
R2263
B583
R1896
C2261
R2275
R2283
C2283
C2237
R2237
R2233
R2221
IC525
IC524
IC523
R2286
R2264
R2514
TPMODD
TPMODC
TPMODB
TPMODA
R2613
R2614
C2258
Q570
Q1802
C2710
C2208
R573
CN587
UN563
R2305
C2520
C2284
R2284
C2262
R2262
R2234
R2615
C2347
R2504
R2232
C2238
R2238
R2222
R2359
R2357
C2353
IC527
C2355
R2349
R2351
C2307
CN588
C1816
R2306
R2360
C2354
R2358
C2356
R2139
R2352
R2350
C2135
C2348
C2407
C2308
G
R2405
R2616
R2517
TPTDO
TPTDI
TPTCK
TPTMS
R2593
R2589
R2587
C2134
R2127
R2138
C2133
R2595
R2596
R2594
R2429
R2433
C2433
F
C588
E
R2140
B2141
C2107
D
C2481
R1832
R2105
B2430
R2137
C1896
R2157
R2159
C702
R2158
C2158
2-20
R704
C2189
R2189
C
CN712
C2138
B
R776
C2137
R1874
R1741
R1751
C1751
R1753
Q1751
R2560
B2505
R2531
C1844
R710
R2532
L1862
B2803
R1771
R580
C2560
C703
R771
B2751
B2701
C587
B2226
R712
D702
R2485
R1814
C722
Q2164
R2183
D1872
C794
C706
R2184
R1862
C792
R716
R2132
B2809
R794
C710
R2134
Q1872
Q772
B2210
R2131
C1818
R1876
L792
R734
R576
R701
C2533
Q2101
R2101
R2130
Q2163
R761
Q701
Q703
IC583
IC505
IC581
C2605
C707
C751
R2171
D771
Q761
R575
R1810
R792
R724
R2182
R1864
D792
Q706
R2136
CN716
R798
Q2165
C1862
B2212
R579
2
C720
C718
Q2154
Q2153
Q2152
Q2151
C1864
B2320
C701
R2181
CN722
Q792
R703
C2157
R1701
B2115
CN711
R2401
R2128
R779
TH783
R789
R781
Q781
C2534
B102
C711
D703
C2502
R2581
R2563
R2573
R705
R2302
LC502
Q2301
Q2363
R2301
R717
R719
C2562
B2101
R2274
R2353
C2351
Q2274
C2504
Q763
C1851
Q1851
R1801
C1803
R2508
TPPB13
R2612
R729
B2601
R707
Q2302
R777
Q773
R1871
B2755
B2105
D773
B2603
B2602
Q2364
C2563
Q2431
R2354
Q2401
C745
R2425
LC503
R578
C579
R574
B2225
R775
Q2156
Q2157
C1810
B2302
B2215
B2213
R709
R2172
R1772
R711
C589
C1808
B2303
R793
Q2155
D1701
B2801
R2186
B2506
R1731
D701
C2352
R1724
C721
C2535
L1761
C793
C705
C590
R1761
TPRX3
C1741
C791
R715
R2356
Q771
B2201
R2586
R2585
R2584
R2583
R2582
C2536
Q1771
L791
C709
C2532
D1771
D791
R733
LC501
R1762
R791
Q705
C2505
CN715
R723
R2355
R1773
R797
C2503
C2510
R2562
R2572
R721
Q707
R725
Q711
C2230
R2226
Q2202
R1855
R1835
TH831
R1833
Q1831
R727
R731
TPRX2
X2501
Q2273
R2273
Q2201
C2008
C2010
C2517
C2511
C2702
R2012
R2023
R2201
B2133
R1827
R1825
R1829
R2235
R2231
D1891
R1893
C2551
C2705
C2004
R2002
C2003
R2001
IC521
IC522
C2020
C2706
TPRX4
K2607
TP607
C584
C2516
C2515
C2514
C2513
C2512
TPRX1
B2756
R1841
D1873
R1877
Q1873
B2757
B2132
R2561
R2571
C2522
IC502
R2718
C2007
C2009
R2225
R2227
C2701
R787
R795
C2561
C2508
C741
Q709
B2103
R2202
R2236
R2010
R2008
R2006
R2276
IC571
C2712
B2205
Q1801
Q1803
C715
R773
C713
R1851
R783
R763
C753
R2501
B2301
B2203
C2507
C1802
C1761
C1801
C2529
R1803
R2703
C1703
B2502
C719
C2006
R1824
B2220
B2206
IC511
C1705
C1863
B2319
C2521
A
R1809
C717
R2709
R1863
Q791
R2024
R2014
C2014
1
C1762
C1807
B2204
C2518
R1712
R1861
B2106
C2519
B2140
VR787
R2702
R2701
B2421
D1801
R2716
R2717
CN713
R1813
R1811
R2715
4
C1805
R2004
D1802
C1806
C1809
C2002
R1725
C1861
C1895
C795
R1853
C1853
C2552
C1841
R1821
C1811
Q1805
R2007
X2551
C2601
R2568
C1815
B2310
C1813
Q1853
LC551
R1805
C582
R1806
B2807
B2130
C581
C1817
C2703
R1703
R1875
B2221
R1823
C2019
L1861
R2564
C2564
K2606
B2120
D1871
C1843
R2021
R1831
C2001
B2425
C2013
R2013
R2022
3
B2501
R2011
R1873
R2009
5
B2131
R2005
C2005
R1895
R1891
Power board
R2003
C1842
RX-8010VBK
DSP board
Reverse side
C796
VR788
Forward side
H
RX-8010VBK
Tuner board
R115
E
B191
B190
C101
Q102
B
Q121
R114
R104
B172
R106
R111
RF101
B196
B124
CF102
B104
C103
CF101
1
C165
C141
T142
C150
B103
C143
C144
C134
C184
15
R122
R143
C123
R126
R184
R124
C146
C164
R145
C121
B182
B181
C128
C148
R144
C122
C147
C149
R182
R134
B132
B131
R127
R183
C130
C196
B112
C192
IC191
B113
C191
C197
C199
C195
R193
R194
D131
T2D
B111
C193
1
1
C
B106
R130
D123
R192
C129
B102
D121
CN112
R191
D129
C126
IC121
CF103
C163
16
R128
R132
B187
C140
R142
R150
IC102
C185
D125
R112
Q113
[DOM]
B176
R108
[DOM]
B177
R147
R140
R162
B122
B188
X121
R161
B174
B175
B178
C111
B183
CN111
C194
X191
B186
C112
D127
30
C186
B121
B133
R157
B
A
2-21
B199
R158
2
C113
T111
C162
B135
B151
C161
R129
B192
R133
B134
C135
R119
B194
E
B193
B189
C138
B
E
D124
B
R103
C133
Q103
B197
C107
B171
C136
B195
C168
R105
C158
R109
E
B
B
Q111
L111
R107
C105
R146
B180
C157
C137
C139
3
C118
C117
[DOM]
B105
Q112
E
L112
B123
4
B198
[DOM]
B173
AT101
D126
5
R141
RX-8010VBK
PARTS LIST
[ RX-8010VBK ]
* All printed circuit boards and its assemblies are not available as service parts.
Area suffix
J ----------------------------- U.S.A.
- Contents Exploded view of general assembly and parts list
Electrical parts list
Packing materials and accessories parts list
3- 3
3- 5
3-21
3-1
RX-8010VBK
< MEMO >
3-2
RX-8010VBK
Exploded view of general assembly and parts list
Block No. M 1 M M
63
72
Power trans board
64
I/O board
50
71
66
71
5
51
52
Power trans
board
49
60
61
47
59
69
67
58
70
49
57
51
56
55
Power/Fuse board
60
53
48
62
rd
oa
Pb
DS
Speaker
board
4
67
o
ide
S V ard
o
b
51
eo
Vid ard
bo
54
t
44
45
Relay board
42
65
pu
io in
d
u
V A oard
b
74
put
io in
Aud oard
b
75
46
3
39
13
33
38
46
5
33
ard
26
45
40
nt
Fro rd (L)
boa
33
42
33
33
nt
Fro rd (R)
boa
25
r
Rea rd (L)
boa
24
43
35
r
Rea rd (R)
boa
1
32
2
34
28
27
38
28
28
41
16
8
e
Tun
r bo
te
Cen
22
19
6
2
ard
r bo
Audio
board
Main
board
37
power switch
board
3
41
Power supply
board
21
39
27
73
7
15
36
73
Front key &
System
control board
20
14
17
12
23
Switch board
9
1
11
10
29
18
30
4
31
68
A
31
B
C
D
E
F
G
3-3
RX-8010VBK
Parts list (General assembly)
A
A
A
Item
Parts number
Parts list (General assembly)
Block No. M1MM
Parts name
Q'ty
Description
A
Area
Item
Parts number
Block No. M1MM
Parts name
Q'ty
Description
1
LV10469-001A
FRONT PANEL
1
49
QYSDSTL4008Z
SPECIAL SCREW
4
2
VJD5429-001SS
JVC MARK
1
50
LV10472-008A
REAR PANEL
1
3
LV20949-004A
LENS
1
51
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
3
R.P-C.BASE
4
LV10470-001A
SUB PANEL
1
52
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
1
R.P-ud---
5
LV20939-001A
PUSH BUTTON
1
POWER BK
53
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
2
TUNER
6
LV42096-001A
INDICATOR
1
POWER
54
FMYH4004-001
PLASTIC RIVET
1
7
LV20951-001A
PUSH BUTTON
1
TUNER
55
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
4
A.INPUT
8
LV20940-001A
P.BUTTON ASSY
1
DOLBY
56
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
3
V.INPUT
9
LV20944-001A
P.BUTTON ASSY
1
SOURCE
57
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
3
VIDEO
10
LV20942-001A
PUSH BUTTON
1
SEA
58
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
4
S VIDEO
11
LV32486-001A
P.BUTTON ASSY
1
LINE STRAIGHT
59
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
6
DIGITAL
P.TRANS
12
LV42095-002A
FL SCREEN
1
FL
60
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
7
COMPONENT
13
QYSDSF2608Z
SCREW
2
FRONT C.B
61
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
4
SPK C.B
14
QYSDSF2608Z
SCREW
2
62
E409257-001
GND TERMINAL
1
15
QYSDSF2608Z
SCREW
8
63
QMPD220-200-JD
POWER CORD
1
16
QUQ412-0815CJ
FFC WIRE
1
64
QZW0033-001
STRAIN RELIEF
1
17
QUQ412-1030CJ
FFC WIRE
1
65
LV20038-009A/S/
TOP COVER
1
18
QYSDSG3006Z
SCREW
4
FRONT D
66
QYSBSGY3008M
SPECIAL SCREW
3
19
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
3
FRONT U
67
E406308-003
SPECIAL SCREW
4
20
LV10019-003A
CHASSIS BASE
1
68
LV32435-003A
VOL KNOB
1
BK
21
EXO150010H09S11
FELT SPACER
1
69
QMF51U1-6R3-J8
FUSE
1
F1
22
LV10471-001A
FRONT BRACKET
1
70
QMF51U1-2R0-J8
FUSE
2
F61 F62
23
QYSDSG3006Z
SCREW
7
71
LV42388-001A
FUSE CAUTION
2
24
LV42094-002A
H.P. BKT
1
72
E409394-001
CAUTION LABEL
1
25
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
1
73
E3400-444
FELT SPACER
2
26
VKZ4150-001
SPECIAL NUT
1
74
QYSBSG3008E
T.SCREW
3
27
E68587-223SM
CB BKT
3
75
QYSBSG3008E
T.SCREW
3
28
QYSBST3006Z
T.SCREW
3
29
QZF6018-001
FOOT
2
30
E47227-036
FOOT
2
31
QYSBST3010Z
T.SCREW
4
32
LV20984-002A
HEAT SINK
1
33
E73525-003SS
SCREW
10
34
LV42098-001A
C.B BKT
1
PRI/SEC C.B
35
QYSBST3006Z
T.SCREW
1
C.B BKT
36
LV32433-001A
H.S BRACKET(R)
1
37
LV32434-001A
H.S BRACKET(L)
1
38
QYSBSG3008Z
T.SCREW
4
H.S-BKT
39
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
2
H.S BKT-F.BKT
40
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
2
H.S BKT
41
QYSBST3006Z
T.SCREW
4
H.S BKT-CHASSIS
42
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
2
M.C.B
M.C.B
A
A
FRONT C.B FL
A
A
FOR C.BASE
C.B-F.B
H.P BKT-F.B
C.B-BKT
FOOT
TR
43
E65923-003
TAPPING SCREW
1
44
LV30225-0B2A
SPACER
1
45
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
3
H.S-C.B
46
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
3
P.C.B
47
QYSBSG3006Z
T.SCREW
1
C.B-CHASSIS
48
QQT0325-001
POWER TRANS.
1
3-4
FS400 FS401
Area
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Main board)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 01
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Remarks
C 801
QCE22HP-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +100:-0%
R 851
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
C 802
QCE22HP-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +100:-0%
R 852
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
C 805
QCE22HP-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +100:-0%
R 871
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
C 807
QEZ0462-688
E CAPACITOR
6800MF
RY831
QSK0109-001
RELAY
C 808
QEZ0462-688
E CAPACITOR
6800MF
RY832
QSK0109-001
RELAY
C 811
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
RY851
QSK0109-001
RELAY
C 816
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
RY852
QSK0109-001
RELAY
C 823
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
RY871
QSK0109-001
RELAY
C 824
QETN1EM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 25V
S 831
QSW0509-001
SLIDE SWITCH
CN 72
QGB2510K1-11
CONNECTOR
ST831
QNB0105-002
SPK TERMINAL
CN 82
QGB2510K1-09
CONNECTOR
ST851
QNB0078-001
SPK TERMINAL
CN701
QGB2510J1-14
CONNECTOR
CN702
QGB2510J1-14
CONNECTOR
CN703
QGB2510J1-10
CONNECTOR
CN705
QGB2510J1-12
CONNECTOR
CN706
QGB2510J1-12
CONNECTOR
CN721
QGA2501C1-03
3P CONNECTOR
CN723
QGA2501C1-04
4P CONNECTOR
CN801
QJK012-032403
SKT WIRE ASSY
CN813
QGA3901C1-04
4P CONNECTOR
CN814
QGA3901C1-06
6P PLUG ASSY
CN823
QJK015-043004
SKT WIRE ASSY
CN824
QJK015-063504
SKT WIRE ASSY
CN831
QGD2501C1-04Z
SOCKET
CN881
QGD2501C1-03Z
SOCKET
D 801
30DF2-FC
DIODE
D 802
30DF2-FC
DIODE
D 803
30DF2-FC
DIODE
D 804
30DF2-FC
DIODE
D 811
MTZJ24C-T2
Z DIODE
D 816
MTZJ18C-T2
Z DIODE
D 825
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 831
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 832
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 851
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 852
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 871
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
EP801
QNZ0136-001Z
EARTH PLATE
FW931
QUM137-08DGZ4
PARA RIBON WIRE
Q 811
2SD2395/EF/
TRANSISTOR
Q 812
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
Q 823
KTC3199/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
Q 824
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
Q 825
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 801
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R 802
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R 811
QRJ146J-150X
UNF C RESISTOR
15 5% 1/4W
R 812
QRK126J-332X
UNF C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/2W
R 813
QRE141J-473Y
C RESISTOR
47K 5% 1/4W
R 814
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 815
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
R 816
QRL022J-332
UNF OMF RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/2W
R 823
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 824
QRE141J-134Y
C RESISTOR
130K 5% 1/4W
R 825
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 826
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R 831
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
R 832
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
R 841
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R 842
QRE141J-823Y
C RESISTOR
82K 5% 1/4W
R 843
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R 844
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R 845
QRE141J-823Y
C RESISTOR
82K 5% 1/4W
Area
3-5
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Front board)
A
Item
BK400
3-6
Parts number
LV42092-001A
Block No. 02
Remarks
Parts name
FL HOLDER(R)
Area
A
Item
IC410
Parts number
Parts name
PCM2702E-X
IC
IC411
NJU7241F33-X
IC
J 400
QND0026-001
S JACK
Remarks
BK401
LV42093-001A
FL HOLDER(L)
C 400
QEKC1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
C 401
NCB31CK-104X
C CAPACITOR
J 401
QNZ0503-001
USB JACK
C 402
NCB31CK-104X
C CAPACITOR
JS400
QSW0898-001
JOG VOLUME
C 404
NCB31EK-223X
C CAPACITOR
K 451
NQR0201-018X
INDUCTOR
C 406
NCB31HK-331X
C CAPACITOR
K 452
NQR0201-018X
INDUCTOR
C 407
QCZ0205-155Z
ML C CAPACITOR
K 453
NQR0201-018X
INDUCTOR
C 408
NCB31EK-223X
C CAPACITOR
K 454
NQR0201-018X
INDUCTOR
C 409
QEKC1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
K 455
NQR0201-018X
INDUCTOR
C 410
QEKC1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
K 456
NQR0201-018X
INDUCTOR
C 411
QCZ0205-155Z
ML C CAPACITOR
1.5MF
Q 402
DTC114TKA-X
TRANSISTOR
C 412
QEKC0JM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 6.3V
Q 403
DTC144WKA-X
TRANSISTOR
C 420
NCB31HK-471X
C CAPACITOR
Q 404
DTC114YKA-X
CHIP D TRANSIST
C 421
NCB31HK-471X
C CAPACITOR
Q 407
DTC114YKA-X
CHIP D TRANSIST
C 422
NCB31HK-471X
C CAPACITOR
Q 408
DTC114YKA-X
CHIP D TRANSIST
C 423
NCB31HK-471X
C CAPACITOR
Q 410
DTA114YKA-X
TRANSISTOR
(DIRECT)
C 424
NCB31HK-471X
C CAPACITOR
Q 411
DTA114YKA-X
TRANSISTOR
(BASS)
C 425
NCB31HK-471X
C CAPACITOR
Q 412
DTA114YKA-X
TRANSISTOR
(STANBY)
C 430
NCB31EK-223X
C CAPACITOR
Q 413
DTA114YKA-X
TRANSISTOR
(SURROUND)
C 431
NCB31EK-223X
C CAPACITOR
Q 414
DTA114YKA-X
TRANSISTOR
(DSP)
C 432
NCS31HJ-220X
C CAPACITOR
R 400
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 433
NCS31HJ-220X
C CAPACITOR
R 401
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 435
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 402
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
C 436
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 403
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 437
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 404
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 438
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 405
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
C 439
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 406
NRSA63J-152X
MG RESISTOR
C 440
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 407
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
C 441
QEK41CM-106
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 16V
R 408
NRSA63J-272X
MG RESISTOR
C 442
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
R 409
NRSA63J-392X
MG RESISTOR
C 443
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
R 410
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 456
NCB31EK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 411
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
CN406
WJP0031-001A
C-B WIRE ASSY
R 412
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
CN410
QGF1205F1-10
CONNECTOR
R 413
NRSA63J-152X
MG RESISTOR
CN412
QGF1205F1-08
CONNECTOR
R 414
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
CN420
QJK025-031301
C-B WIRE ASSY
(LEFT)
R 415
NRSA63J-272X
MG RESISTOR
CN422
QJK025-041201
SIN ID C-B WIRE
(RIGHT)
R 416
NRSA63J-392X
MG RESISTOR
CN430
QGA2501C1-03
3P CONNECTOR
R 417
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
CN432
QGA2501C1-04
4P CONNECTOR
R 418
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
D 405
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
R 419
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
D 410
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(FM/AM)
R 420
NRSA63J-152X
MG RESISTOR
D 411
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(USB)
R 421
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
D 412
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(TAPE)
R 422
NRSA63J-272X
MG RESISTOR
D 413
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(CDR)
R 423
NRSA63J-392X
MG RESISTOR
D 414
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(PHONE)
R 424
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
D 415
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(CD)
R 425
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
D 416
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(TV/DBS)
R 426
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
D 417
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(VIDEO)
R 431
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
D 418
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(VCR2)
R 432
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
D 419
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(VCR1)
R 433
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
D 420
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(DVD MULTI)
R 434
NRSA63J-152X
MG RESISTOR
D 421
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(DVD)
R 435
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
D 422
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(SURROUND)
R 436
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
D 423
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(DSP)
R 443
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
D 480
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(STANDBY)
R 445
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
D 490
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(DIRECT)
R 446
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
D 491
SLR-342VC-T
LED
(BASS)
R 447
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
DI400
QLF0084-001
FL TUBE
R 448
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC400
MN101C35DHL1
IC
MASUKU
R 449
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC400
MN101CP35DHL1
IC
ONE TIME
R 450
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC402
BU2092
IC
R 451
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC404
GP1U281X
IC
R 452
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
1.5MF
Area
RX-8010VBK
Block No. 02
Electrical parts list (Front board)
A
Item
Parts number
Remarks
Parts name
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Remarks
R 453
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
S 482
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(SPK2)
R 454
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
S 483
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(SUBWFR)
R 455
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
S 490
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(DIRECT)
R 456
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
S 491
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(BASS)
R 457
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
X 400
QAX0246-001Z
RESONATOR
R 458
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
X 410
QAX0320-001Z
CRYSTAL
R 459
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 460
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 461
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 462
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 463
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 464
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
RA400
QRB169J-104
RESISTOR ARRAY
100K 5% 1/6W
R 465
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
RA401
QRB169J-104
RESISTOR ARRAY
100K 5% 1/6W
R 466
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
RA402
QRB169J-104
RESISTOR ARRAY
100K 5% 1/6W
R 467
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
RA403
QRB059J-104
RESISTOR ARRAY
100K 5% 1/5W
R 468
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 469
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 470
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 471
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 472
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 473
NRSA63J-152X
MG RESISTOR
R 474
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
R 475
NRSA63J-220X
MG RESISTOR
R 476
NRSA63J-220X
MG RESISTOR
R 477
NRSA63J-220X
MG RESISTOR
R 479
NRSA63J-181X
MG RESISTOR
R 480
NRSA63J-152X
MG RESISTOR
R 481
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
R 482
NRSA63J-272X
MG RESISTOR
R 483
NRSA63J-392X
MG RESISTOR
R 490
NRSA63J-272X
MG RESISTOR
R 491
NRSA63J-392X
MG RESISTOR
R 495
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
S 400
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(SURROUND)
S 401
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(DSP MODE)
S 402
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(INPUT MODE)
S 403
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(TUNING UP)
S 404
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(PRESET UP)
S 405
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(FM MODE)
S 406
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(MEMORY)
S 407
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(MIDNIGHT MODE)
S 408
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(DVD)
S 409
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(DVD MULTI)
S 410
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(TUNING DOWN)
S 411
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(PRESET DOWN)
S 412
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(VCR1)
S 413
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(VCR2)
S 414
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(VIDEO)
S 415
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(CD)
S 416
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(TV/DBS)
S 417
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(CDR)
S 418
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(USB AUDIO)
S 419
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(PHONE)
S 420
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(FM/AM)
S 421
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(DIGITAL SEA)
S 422
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(LEVEL ADJUST)
S 423
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(TAPE/MD)
S 424
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(DOWN)
S 425
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(EFECT)
S 426
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(SETTING)
S 431
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(UP)
S 480
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(POWER)
S 481
QSW0683-001Z
PUSH SWITCH
(SPK1)
Area
When IC400 uses "one time micon",this list is used.
3-7
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Power board)
A
Item
C 701
3-8
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 03
Remarks
QTE1V06-106Z
E CAPACITOR
C 702
QTE1V06-106Z
E CAPACITOR
C 703
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
C 704
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
C 705
QCS11HJ-101
C 706
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Remarks
C1808
QETN1CM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 16V
C1809
QCS31HJ-5R0Z
C CAPACITOR
5.0PF 5% 50V
C1810
QCS31HJ-5R0Z
C CAPACITOR
5.0PF 5% 50V
100PF 5% 50V
C1811
QCS32HJ-330Z
C CAPACITOR
33PF 5% 500V
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
C1812
QCS32HJ-330Z
C CAPACITOR
33PF 5% 500V
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
C1813
QFLC1HJ-103Z
M CAPACITOR
.010MF 5% 50V
C 707
QETN1CM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 16V
C1814
QFLC1HJ-103Z
M CAPACITOR
.010MF 5% 50V
C 708
QETN1CM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 16V
C1815
QETN1HM-225Z
E CAPACITOR
2.2MF 20% 50V
C 709
QCS11HJ-100
C CAPACITOR
10PF 5% 50V
C1816
QETN1HM-225Z
E CAPACITOR
2.2MF 20% 50V
C 710
QCS11HJ-100
C CAPACITOR
10PF 5% 50V
C1817
QETN1HM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 50V
C 711
QFLC1HJ-103Z
M CAPACITOR
.010MF 5% 50V
C1818
QETN1HM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 50V
C 712
QFLC1HJ-103Z
M CAPACITOR
.010MF 5% 50V
C1841
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C 713
QCS11HJ-680
C CAPACITOR
68PF 5% 50V
C1842
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C 714
QCS11HJ-680
C CAPACITOR
68PF 5% 50V
C1843
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C 715
QCS11HJ-680
C CAPACITOR
68PF 5% 50V
C1844
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C 716
QCS11HJ-680
C CAPACITOR
68PF 5% 50V
C1851
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
C 717
QCS32HJ-220Z
C CAPACITOR
22PF 5% 500V
C1852
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
C 718
QCS32HJ-220Z
C CAPACITOR
22PF 5% 500V
C1853
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
C 719
QFLC1HJ-472Z
M CAPACITOR
4700PF 5% 50V
C1854
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
C 720
QFLC1HJ-472Z
M CAPACITOR
4700PF 5% 50V
C1861
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
C 741
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C1862
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
C 742
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C1863
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
C 745
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C1864
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
C 746
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
C1891
QCF31HZ-223Z
C CAPACITOR
.022MF +80:-20%
C 751
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
C1892
QCF31HZ-223Z
C CAPACITOR
.022MF +80:-20%
C 752
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
D 701
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 753
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
D 702
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 754
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
D 703
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 791
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
D 704
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 792
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
D 771
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 793
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
D 772
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 794
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
D 773
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 795
QCF31HZ-223Z
C CAPACITOR
.022MF +80:-20%
D 774
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 796
QCF31HZ-223Z
C CAPACITOR
.022MF +80:-20%
D 791
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
CN711
QGB2510K1-14
CONNECTOR
D 792
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
CN712
QGB2510K1-14
CONNECTOR
D1701
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
CN713
QGB2510K1-10
CONNECTOR
D1771
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
CN715
QGB2510K1-12
CONNECTOR
D1772
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
CN716
QGB2510K1-12
CONNECTOR
D1791
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
CN722
QGA2501F1-02
CONNECTOR
D1801
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1701
QETN1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
D1802
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1702
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
D1871
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1703
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
D1872
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1704
QETN1CM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 16V
D1873
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1705
QCS31HJ-5R0Z
C CAPACITOR
5.0PF 5% 50V
D1874
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1711
QCS32HJ-330Z
C CAPACITOR
33PF 5% 500V
D1891
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1712
QFLC1HJ-103Z
M CAPACITOR
.010MF 5% 50V
D1892
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C1713
QETN1HM-225Z
E CAPACITOR
2.2MF 20% 50V
L 791
QQLZ003-1R0
INDUCTOR
C1715
QETN1HM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 50V
L 792
QQLZ003-1R0
INDUCTOR
C1741
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
L1761
QQLZ005-R45
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
C1743
QETN2AM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 100V
L1861
QQLZ005-R45
C1751
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
L1862
QQLZ005-R45
INDUCTOR
C1752
QCS32HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
47PF 5% 500V
Q 701
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
C1761
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
Q 702
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
C1762
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
Q 703
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
C1791
QCF31HZ-223Z
C CAPACITOR
.022MF +80:-20%
Q 704
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
C1801
QETN1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
Q 705
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1802
QETN1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
Q 706
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1803
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
Q 707
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1804
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
Q 708
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1805
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
Q 709
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1806
QCS11HJ-101
C CAPACITOR
100PF 5% 50V
Q 710
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1807
QETN1CM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 16V
Q 711
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
Area
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Power board)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 03
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Remarks
Q 712
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 726
QRE141J-152Y
C RESISTOR
1.5K 5% 1/4W
Q 761
2SD2560/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 727
QRE141J-333Y
C RESISTOR
33K 5% 1/4W
Q 762
2SD2560/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 728
QRE141J-333Y
C RESISTOR
33K 5% 1/4W
Q 763
2SB1647/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 729
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q 764
2SB1647/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 730
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q 771
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 731
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q 772
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 732
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q 773
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 733
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
Q 774
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 734
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
Q 781
2SD637/QR/
TRANSISTOR
R 761
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
Q 782
2SD637/QR/
TRANSISTOR
R 762
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
Q 791
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 763
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
Q 792
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 764
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
Q1701
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
R 771
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q1702
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
R 772
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q1703
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 773
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q1731
2SD637/QR/
TRANSISTOR
R 774
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q1751
2SD2390/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 775
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
Q1752
2SB1560/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 776
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
Q1771
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 777
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
Q1772
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 778
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
Q1791
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 779
QRZ0218-R22
EMIT RESISTOR
Q1801
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
R 780
QRZ0218-R22
EMIT RESISTOR
Q1802
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
R 781
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q1803
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
R 782
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
Q1804
2SC2240-BL/AB/T
TRANSISTOR
R 783
QRE141J-621Y
C RESISTOR
620 5% 1/4W
Q1805
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 784
QRE141J-621Y
C RESISTOR
620 5% 1/4W
Q1806
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 787
QRE141J-473Y
C RESISTOR
47K 5% 1/4W
Q1831
2SD637/QR/
TRANSISTOR
R 788
QRE141J-473Y
C RESISTOR
47K 5% 1/4W
Q1832
2SD637/QR/
TRANSISTOR
R 789
QRE141J-471Y
C RESISTOR
470 5% 1/4W
Q1851
2SD2390/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 790
QRE141J-471Y
C RESISTOR
470 5% 1/4W
Q1852
2SD2390/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 791
QRJ125J-330
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
Q1853
2SB1560/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 792
QRJ125J-330
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
Q1854
2SB1560/OPY/-F6
TRANSISTOR
R 793
QRL022J-100
UNF OMF RESISTOR
10 5% 1/2W
Q1871
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 794
QRL022J-100
UNF OMF RESISTOR
10 5% 1/2W
Q1872
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 795
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
Q1873
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 796
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
Q1874
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 797
QRE141J-153Y
C RESISTOR
15K 5% 1/4W
Q1891
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R 798
QRE141J-153Y
C RESISTOR
15K 5% 1/4W
Q1892
KTA1268/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
R1701
QRE141J-222Y
C RESISTOR
2.2K 5% 1/4W
R 701
QRE141J-222Y
C RESISTOR
2.2K 5% 1/4W
R1702
QRE141J-683Y
C RESISTOR
68K 5% 1/4W
R 702
QRE141J-222Y
C RESISTOR
2.2K 5% 1/4W
R1703
QRE141J-202Y
C RESISTOR
2.0K 5% 1/4W
R 703
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R1705
QRE141J-123Y
C RESISTOR
12K 5% 1/4W
R 704
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R1711
QRE141J-331Y
C RESISTOR
330 5% 1/4W
R 705
QRE141J-202Y
C RESISTOR
2.0K 5% 1/4W
R1712
QRE141J-563Y
C RESISTOR
56K 5% 1/4W
R 706
QRE141J-202Y
C RESISTOR
2.0K 5% 1/4W
R1721
QRJ146J-221X
UNF C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 707
QRE141J-202Y
C RESISTOR
2.0K 5% 1/4W
R1722
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R 708
QRE141J-202Y
C RESISTOR
2.0K 5% 1/4W
R1723
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R 709
QRE141J-912Y
C RESISTOR
9.1K 5% 1/4W
R1724
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R 710
QRE141J-912Y
C RESISTOR
9.1K 5% 1/4W
R1725
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R 711
QRE141J-621Y
C RESISTOR
620 5% 1/4W
R1731
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
R 712
QRE141J-621Y
C RESISTOR
620 5% 1/4W
R1732
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R 715
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R1741
QRJ146J-221X
UNF C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 716
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R1751
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
R 717
QRJ146J-562X
UNF C RESISTOR
5.6K 5% 1/4W
R1752
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
R 718
QRJ146J-562X
UNF C RESISTOR
5.6K 5% 1/4W
R1753
QRZ0218-R22
EMIT RESISTOR
R 719
QRK126J-103X
UNF C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/2W
R1761
QRJ125J-330
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
Area
1/2W
1/2W
1/2W
R 720
QRK126J-103X
UNF C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/2W
R1762
QRL022J-100
UNF OMF RESISTOR
10 5% 1/2W
R 721
QRJ146J-151X
UNF C RESISTOR
150 5% 1/4W
R1771
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R 722
QRJ146J-151X
UNF C RESISTOR
150 5% 1/4W
R1772
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R 723
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1773
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
R 724
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1774
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
R 725
QRE141J-152Y
C RESISTOR
1.5K 5% 1/4W
R1791
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
3-9
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Power board)
A
3-10
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 03
Remarks
R1793
QRE141J-183Y
C RESISTOR
18K 5% 1/4W
R1795
QRE141J-473Y
C RESISTOR
47K 5% 1/4W
R1801
QRE141J-222Y
C RESISTOR
2.2K 5% 1/4W
R1802
QRE141J-222Y
C RESISTOR
2.2K 5% 1/4W
R1803
QRE141J-683Y
C RESISTOR
68K 5% 1/4W
R1804
QRE141J-683Y
C RESISTOR
68K 5% 1/4W
R1805
QRE141J-202Y
C RESISTOR
2.0K 5% 1/4W
R1806
QRE141J-202Y
C RESISTOR
2.0K 5% 1/4W
R1809
QRE141J-123Y
C RESISTOR
12K 5% 1/4W
R1810
QRE141J-123Y
C RESISTOR
12K 5% 1/4W
R1811
QRE141J-331Y
C RESISTOR
330 5% 1/4W
R1812
QRE141J-331Y
C RESISTOR
330 5% 1/4W
R1813
QRE141J-563Y
C RESISTOR
56K 5% 1/4W
R1814
QRE141J-563Y
C RESISTOR
56K 5% 1/4W
R1821
QRJ146J-221X
UNF C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R1822
QRJ146J-221X
UNF C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R1823
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1824
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1825
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1826
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1827
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1828
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1829
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1830
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R1831
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
R1832
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
R1833
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1834
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1841
QRJ146J-221X
UNF C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R1842
QRJ146J-221X
UNF C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R1851
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
R1852
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
R1853
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
R1854
QRJ146J-100X
UNF C RESISTOR
10 5% 1/4W
R1855
QRZ0218-R22
EMIT RESISTOR
R1856
QRZ0218-R22
EMIT RESISTOR
R1861
QRJ125J-330
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
R1862
QRJ125J-330
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
R1863
QRL022J-100
UNF OMF RESISROR
10 5% 1/2W
R1864
QRL022J-100
UNF OMF RESISTOR
10 5% 1/2W
R1871
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1872
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1873
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1874
QRE141J-391Y
C RESISTOR
390 5% 1/4W
R1875
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
R1876
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
R1877
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
R1878
QRE141J-201Y
C RESISTOR
200 5% 1/4W
R1891
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
R1892
QRE141J-102Y
C RESISTOR
1.0K 5% 1/4W
R1893
QRE141J-183Y
C RESISTOR
18K 5% 1/4W
R1894
QRE141J-183Y
C RESISTOR
18K 5% 1/4W
R1895
QRE141J-473Y
C RESISTOR
47K 5% 1/4W
R1896
QRE141J-473Y
C RESISTOR
47K 5% 1/4W
TH731
QAD0012-202
THERMISTOR
TH783
QAD0012-202
THERMISTOR
TH784
QAD0012-202
THERMISTOR
TH831
QAD0012-202
THERMISTOR
TH832
QAD0012-202
THERMISTOR
VR787
QVP0008-501Z
SEMI V RESISTOR
VR788
QVP0008-501Z
SEMI V RESISTOR
1/2W
1/2W
Area
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Input board)
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 04
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Remarks
C 201
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 308
QFLC1HJ-682Z
M CAPACITOR
C 202
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 309
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
C 203
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 6.3V
C 310
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
C 204
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 311
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 205
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 6.3V
C 312
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 206
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 313
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
C 207
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 6.3V
C 314
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
C 208
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
C 315
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
C 209
QCF11HZ-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +80:-20%
C 316
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
C 210
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 321
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
C 211
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 322
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
C 212
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
C 333
NCB31HK-391X
C CAPACITOR
C 213
QCF11HZ-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +80:-20%
C 334
NCB31HK-391X
C CAPACITOR
C 214
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 335
QETN1EM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 25V
C 215
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 336
QETN1EM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 25V
C 216
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
C 339
NCB31HK-561X
C CAPACITOR
C 217
QETN1AM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 10V
C 341
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 218
QCZ0202-155Z
ML C CAPACITOR
1.5MF
C 342
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 219
QDC31HJ-150Z
C CAPACITOR
C 343
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 220
QDC31HJ-100Z
C CAPACITOR
C 344
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 221
QDC31HJ-470Z
C CAPACITOR
C 361
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 222
QDC31HJ-270Z
C CAPACITOR
C 362
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 223
NCB31HK-102X
C CAPACITOR
C 363
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 224
NCB31HK-271X
C CAPACITOR
C 364
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C 225
NCS31HJ-121X
C CAPACITOR
C 385
QETN1EM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 25V
C 226
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
C 386
QETN1EM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 25V
C 231
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
C 389
NCB31HK-561X
C CAPACITOR
C 241
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
C 391
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 242
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
C 392
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 244
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
C 393
NCB31HK-122X
C CAPACITOR
C 245
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
C 394
NCB31HK-122X
C CAPACITOR
C 246
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
C 395
NCS31HJ-121X
C CAPACITOR
C 247
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
C 396
NCS31HJ-121X
C CAPACITOR
C 249
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
C 397
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 250
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
C 398
QETN1HM-106Z
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 50V
C 251
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
CN200
QGB2510K1-11
CONNECTOR
C 252
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
CN204
QGB1214K1-08S
CONNECTOR
C 253
NCS31HJ-100X
C CAPACITOR
CN205
QGB1214J1-08S
CONNECTOR
C 254
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
CN206
QGA2501F1-02
CONNECTOR
C 255
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
CN240
QGB2510K1-12
CONNECTOR
C 256
QCF11HZ-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +80:-20%
CN242
QGB1214K1-10S
CONNECTOR
C 257
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
CN243
QGB1214J1-10S
CONNECTOR
C 258
QCF11HZ-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +80:-20%
CN244
QGA2501F1-04
CONNECTOR
C 259
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
CN311
QGB2510K1-14
CONNECTOR
C 260
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
CN313
QGB2510K1-13
CONNECTOR
C 261
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
CN351
QGB1214K1-16S
CONNECTOR
C 268
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
CN361
QGB1214J1-16S
CONNECTOR
C 269
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
CN371
QGB1214K1-14S
CONNECTOR
C 270
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
CN381
QGB1214J1-14S
CONNECTOR
C 271
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
CN416
QGA2501F1-06
CONNECTOR
C 272
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
CN501
QGB1214J1-12S
CONNECTOR
C 273
QDX31EM-473Z
C CAPACITOR
CN731
QJP001-032301
SHI CR C-B WIRE
C 274
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
CN732
WJP0026-001A
CONNECTOR
C 275
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
C1281
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
C 276
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
C1282
QETN1AM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 10V
C 277
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C1283
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
C 301
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C1284
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
C 302
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
C1285
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
C 303
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
C1286
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
C 304
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
C1301
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
C 305
QFLC1HJ-182Z
M CAPACITOR
1800PF 5% 50V
C1302
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
C 306
QFLC1HJ-182Z
M CAPACITOR
1800PF 5% 50V
C1303
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
C 307
QFLC1HJ-682Z
M CAPACITOR
6800PF 5% 50V
C1305
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
4.7MF 20% 50V
4.7MF 20% 50V
470MF 20% 6.3V
4.7MF 20% 50V
470MF 20% 6.3V
4.7MF 20% 50V
470MF 20% 6.3V
Area
6800PF 5% 50V
47MF 20% 25V
3-11
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Input board)
A
3-12
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 04
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
C1306
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
HL203
VYH7653-005
IC HOLDER
C1307
QETN1CM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 16V
IC201
BA7625
IC
C1311
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC202
NJM2285V-W
IC
C1312
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC203
MB90088PF-131
IC
C1313
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC241
BA7626
IC
C1314
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC242
BA7625
IC
C1315
QER61HM-224Z
E CAPACITOR
.22MF 20% 50V
IC301
NJM4580D-D
IC
C1316
QER61HM-224Z
E CAPACITOR
.22MF 20% 50V
IC302
TC9164AF-X
IC
C1319
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
IC303
BA15218F-XE
IC
C1321
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC304
BA15218F-XE
IC
C1322
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC371
TC9163AF-X
IC
C1323
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC372
BA15218F-XE
IC
C1324
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC380
TC9162AN
IC
C1325
QER61HM-224Z
E CAPACITOR
.22MF 20% 50V
IC381
TC9459F-X
IC
C1326
QER61HM-224Z
E CAPACITOR
.22MF 20% 50V
IC382
TC9459F-X
IC
C1329
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
IC383
TC9459F-X
IC
C1331
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC385
BA15218F-XE
IC
C1332
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC386
BA15218F-XE
IC
C1333
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC388
TC74HC4053AF-X
IC
C1334
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
IC389
TC74HC4053AF-X
IC
C1339
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
IC390
MAX4018ESD-X
IC
C1341
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
J 201
QNN0078-001
PIN JACK
C1342
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
J 202
QNN0011-001
PIN JACK
C1343
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
J 203
QNN0011-001
PIN JACK
C1344
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
J 241
QND0002-001
S-CONNECTOR
C1345
NCB31HK-391X
C CAPACITOR
J 242
QND0028-001
DIN CONNECTOR
C1361
NCB31HK-391X
C CAPACITOR
J 243
QND0088-001
S JACK
C1362
NCB31HK-391X
C CAPACITOR
J 301
QNN0056-001
PIN JACK
C1363
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
J 302
QNN0056-001
PIN JACK
C1364
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
J 303
QNN0058-001
PIN JACK
C1365
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
J 371
QNN0056-001
PIN JACK
C1366
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
J 372
QNN0056-001
PIN JACK
C1370
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
J 373
QNN0056-001
PIN JACK
C1371
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
J1340
QNN0060-001
PIN JACK
C1372
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
J1360
QNN0390-001
PIN JACK
C1375
QCF11HZ-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +80:-20%
J1370
QNS0083-001
3.5 JACK
C1376
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
J1371
QNS0077-001
3.5 JACK
C1377
QCF11HZ-103
C CAPACITOR
.010MF +80:-20%
J1372
QNS0083-001
3.5 JACK
C1378
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
J1380
QNN0391-001
PIN JACK
C1380
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
L 200
NQL085J-220X
INDUCTOR
C1381
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
Q 200
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1382
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
Q 201
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1383
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
Q 202
KRC110M-T
TRANSISTOR
C1384
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
Q 203
KRC107M-T
D TRANSISTOR
C1385
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
Q 204
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1386
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
Q 205
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1387
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
Q 206
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1388
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
Q 207
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1389
NCS31HJ-470X
C CAPACITOR
Q 208
DTC123YSA-T
D TRANSISTOR
C1390
QETN1EM-476Z
E CAPACITOR
47MF 20% 25V
Q 240
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1391
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
Q 241
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1392
QETN1HM-475Z
E CAPACITOR
4.7MF 20% 50V
Q 242
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1393
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
Q 243
KTA1267/YG/-T
TRANSISTOR
C1394
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
Q 244
KRC110M-T
TRANSISTOR
C1395
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
Q 245
KRC110M-T
TRANSISTOR
C1396
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 6.3V
Q 246
KRC107M-T
D TRANSISTOR
C1397
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
Q 247
KRC107M-T
D TRANSISTOR
C1398
QETN1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
Q1307
KRA104M-T
D TRANSISTOR
D 200
1SS133-T1
SI DIODE
Q1313
2SC3576-JVC-T
TRANSISTOR
D 201
1SS133-T1
SI DIODE
Q1314
2SC3576-JVC-T
TRANSISTOR
D 240
1SS133-T1
SI DIODE
Q1323
2SC3576-JVC-T
TRANSISTOR
D 241
1SS133-T1
SI DIODE
Q1333
2SC3576-JVC-T
TRANSISTOR
D1370
MA3062/H/-X
ZENER DIODE
Q1334
2SC3576-JVC-T
TRANSISTOR
Remarks
Area
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Input board)
A
Item
Q1341
A
A
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 04
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Remarks
2SC3576-JVC-T
TRANSISTOR
R 302
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
Q1342
2SC3576-JVC-T
TRANSISTOR
R 303
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
Q1343
KRA104M-T
D TRANSISTOR
R 304
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R 200
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 305
NRSA63J-621X
MG RESISTOR
R 201
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 306
NRSA63J-621X
MG RESISTOR
R 202
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 307
NRSA63J-393X
MG RESISTOR
R 203
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 308
NRSA63J-393X
MG RESISTOR
R 204
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 309
NRSA63J-474X
MG RESISTOR
R 205
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 310
NRSA63J-474X
MG RESISTOR
R 206
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 311
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 207
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
R 312
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 208
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
R 315
QRJ146J-331X
UNF C RESISTOR
330 5% 1/4W
R 209
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R 316
QRJ146J-331X
UNF C RESISTOR
330 5% 1/4W
R 210
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
R 323
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 211
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R 324
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 212
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
R 325
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 213
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R 326
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 214
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 327
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 215
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 328
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 216
NRSA63J-301X
MG RESISTOR
R 329
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 217
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R 330
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 218
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
R 331
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 219
NRSA63J-101X
MG RESISTOR
R 332
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 220
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 333
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 221
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 334
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 222
NRSA63J-561X
MG RESISTOR
R 335
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R 223
NRSA63J-561X
MG RESISTOR
R 336
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R 224
NRSA63J-561X
MG RESISTOR
R 341
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 225
QRJ146J-2R2X
UNF C RESISTOR
R 342
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 231
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
R 343
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 232
NRSA63J-470X
MG RESISTOR
R 344
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 240
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 345
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 241
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 346
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 242
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 361
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 243
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 362
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 244
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 363
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 245
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 364
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 246
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 365
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 247
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 366
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 248
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 371
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 249
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 372
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 250
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 373
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 251
NRSA63J-151X
MG RESISTOR
R 374
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 253
NRSA63J-153X
MG RESISTOR
R 375
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 254
NRSA63J-153X
MG RESISTOR
R 376
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 255
NRSA63J-153X
MG RESISTOR
R 377
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 266
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 378
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 267
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R 379
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 268
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 380
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 269
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R 381
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 271
QRJ146J-3R3X
UNF C RESISTOR
R 382
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 272
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 385
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R 273
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R 386
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R 274
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 387
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 275
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 388
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 276
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R 389
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 280
NRSA63J-301X
MG RESISTOR
R 390
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R 281
NRSA63J-301X
MG RESISTOR
R 391
NRSA63J-512X
MG RESISTOR
R 282
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R 392
NRSA63J-512X
MG RESISTOR
R 283
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R 393
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R 284
NRSA63J-301X
MG RESISTOR
R 394
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R 285
NRSA63J-301X
MG RESISTOR
R 395
NRSA63J-512X
MG RESISTOR
R 301
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
R 396
NRSA63J-512X
MG RESISTOR
A
A
A
A
2.2 5% 1/4W
3.3 5% 1/4W
A
A
Area
3-13
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Input board)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
3-14
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 04
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
R 397
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1368
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 398
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1370
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R1281
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
R1371
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R1282
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
R1372
NRSA63J-101X
MG RESISTOR
R1283
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1373
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R1284
NRSA63J-112X
MG RESISTOR
R1374
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R1285
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
R1375
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R1286
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
R1379
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1287
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1380
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1288
NRSA63J-112X
MG RESISTOR
R1381
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1289
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
R1382
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1290
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
R1383
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1291
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1384
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1292
NRSA63J-112X
MG RESISTOR
R1385
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1293
NRSA63J-162X
MG RESISTOR
R1386
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1294
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
R1387
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R1301
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R1388
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R1302
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R1389
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R1303
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
R1390
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R1304
NRSA63J-122X
MG RESISTOR
X 200
QAX0260-001Z
CRYSTAL
R1305
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R1306
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R1307
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1311
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1312
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1313
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1314
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R1315
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R1316
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1321
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1322
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1323
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1324
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R1329
NRSA63J-0R0X
MG RESISTOR
R1330
NRSA63J-0R0X
MG RESISTOR
R1331
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1332
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1333
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1334
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R1335
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R1336
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1341
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1342
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R1343
NRSA63J-183X
MG RESISTOR
R1344
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1345
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R1346
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R1347
NRSA63J-471X
MG RESISTOR
R1348
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R1349
NRSA63J-474X
MG RESISTOR
R1350
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R1351
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
68 1/0W
R1355
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
R1356
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
R1357
NRSA63J-392X
MG RESISTOR
R1358
NRSA63J-392X
MG RESISTOR
R1361
NRSA63J-561X
MG RESISTOR
R1362
NRSA63J-561X
MG RESISTOR
R1363
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1364
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1365
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1366
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R1367
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
Remarks
Area
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (DSP board)
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 05
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
C 571
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2308
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C 573
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2347
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C 577
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
C2348
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C 579
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
C2349
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C 581
NEA71CM-106X
E CAPACITOR
C2350
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C 582
NEA71CM-106X
E CAPACITOR
C2351
NEA71HM-105X
E CAPACITOR
C 583
NEA70JM-476X
E CAPACITOR
C2352
NEA71HM-105X
E CAPACITOR
C 584
NCB31CK-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2353
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C 587
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2354
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C 588
NEA70JM-476X
E CAPACITOR
C2355
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C 589
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2356
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C 590
NEA70GM-107X
E CAPACITOR
C2357
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
CN581
QGB1214K3-12W
CONNECTOR
C2358
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
CN587
QGB2510K1-07
CONNECTOR
C2401
NCB31HK-102X
C CAPACITOR
C2001
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2407
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2002
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2427
NEA71HM-225X
E CAPACITOR
C2003
NCB31HK-122X
C CAPACITOR
C2433
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2004
NCB31HK-122X
C CAPACITOR
C2439
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2005
NCS31HJ-121X
C CAPACITOR
C2440
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2006
NCS31HJ-121X
C CAPACITOR
C2441
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2007
NCS31HJ-391X
C CAPACITOR
C2442
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2008
NCS31HJ-391X
C CAPACITOR
C2481
NEA70JM-476X
E CAPACITOR
C2009
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2501
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2010
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2502
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2013
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2503
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2014
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2504
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2018
NEA70JM-476X
E CAPACITOR
C2505
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2019
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2506
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2020
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2507
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2101
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2508
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2107
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2509
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2133
NCB31EK-223X
C CAPACITOR
C2510
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2134
NCB31EK-223X
C CAPACITOR
C2511
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2135
NEA71CM-106X
E CAPACITOR
C2512
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2136
NEA71CM-106X
E CAPACITOR
C2513
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2137
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2514
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2138
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2515
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2157
NEA71HM-225X
E CAPACITOR
C2516
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2158
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2517
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2187
NEA71HM-225X
E CAPACITOR
C2518
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2189
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2519
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2201
NCB31HK-102X
C CAPACITOR
C2520
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2202
NCB31HK-102X
C CAPACITOR
C2521
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2207
NEA71HM-225X
E CAPACITOR
C2522
NCB31HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
C2208
NEA71HM-225X
E CAPACITOR
C2523
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2230
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2529
NEA70GM-107X
E CAPACITOR
C2237
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2532
NEA70GM-107X
E CAPACITOR
C2238
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2533
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2251
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2534
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2252
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2535
NEA70GM-107X
E CAPACITOR
C2253
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2536
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2254
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2551
NCS31HJ-270X
C CAPACITOR
C2255
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2552
NCS31HJ-270X
C CAPACITOR
C2256
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2553
NEA70GM-107X
E CAPACITOR
C2257
NEA71HM-225X
E CAPACITOR
C2555
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2258
NEA71HM-225X
E CAPACITOR
C2556
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2261
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2557
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2262
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2560
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2283
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2561
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2284
NCS31HJ-330X
C CAPACITOR
C2562
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2301
NCB31HK-102X
C CAPACITOR
C2563
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
C2302
NCB31HK-102X
C CAPACITOR
C2564
NCS31HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
C2307
NEA71EM-475X
E CAPACITOR
C2568
NEA71HM-105X
E CAPACITOR
Remarks
Area
3-15
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (DSP board)
A
3-16
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 05
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
C2601
NCB31CK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 574
NRSA63J-432X
MG RESISTOR
C2605
NCB31CK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 575
NRSA63J-432X
MG RESISTOR
C2701
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
R 576
NRSA63J-432X
MG RESISTOR
C2702
NCB31HK-221X
C CAPACITOR
R 577
NRSA63J-822X
MG RESISTOR
C2703
NEA70JM-476X
E CAPACITOR
R 578
NRSA63J-822X
MG RESISTOR
C2704
NEA70JM-476X
E CAPACITOR
R 579
NRSA63J-822X
MG RESISTOR
C2705
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 580
NRSA63J-822X
MG RESISTOR
C2706
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
R 582
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
C2707
NCB31CK-104X
C CAPACITOR
R2001
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
C2710
NEA70JM-476X
E CAPACITOR
R2002
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
C2712
NCF31CZ-104X
C CAPACITOR
R2003
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
EP561
E409182-001SM
GRAND TERMINAL
R2004
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC501
XCA56367PV150
IC
R2005
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC502
TC7S04FU-X
IC
R2006
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC503
TC7S04FU-X
IC
R2007
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC505
PQ070XZ1HZ-X
IC
R2008
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC511
W24L010AJ-12-X
IC
R2009
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC521
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2010
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC522
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2011
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
IC523
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2012
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
IC524
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2013
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
IC525
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2014
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
IC526
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2017
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
IC527
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2018
NRSA63J-472X
MG RESISTOR
IC528
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2021
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
IC529
BA15218F-XE
IC
R2022
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
IC551
AK4112AVF-X
IC
R2023
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
IC571
AK4527BVQ
IC
R2024
NRSA63J-331X
MG RESISTOR
IC581
UPD784215AGC132 IC
R2101
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
IC582
TC7SET32FU-X
IC
R2105
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
IC583
PQ3DZ53-X
IC
R2107
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
J 564
QNN0347-001
PIN JACK
R2127
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
K2606
NQR0269-004X
FERRITE BEADS
R2128
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
K2607
NQR0269-004X
FERRITE BEADS
R2129
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
LC501
NQR0322-001X
EMI FILTER
R2130
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
LC502
NQR0322-001X
EMI FILTER
R2131
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
LC503
NQR0322-001X
EMI FILTER
R2132
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
LC551
NQR0322-001X
EMI FILTER
R2133
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
Q 570
DTC114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2134
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
Q 572
DTC114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2135
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
Q2101
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2136
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
Q2151
DTA114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2137
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
Q2152
DTA114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2138
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
Q2153
DTA114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2139
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
Q2154
DTA114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2140
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2155
DTA114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2157
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
Q2156
DTA114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2158
NRSA63J-303X
MG RESISTOR
Q2157
DTA114YE-X
TRANSISTOR
R2159
NRSA63J-113X
MG RESISTOR
Q2163
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2171
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2164
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2172
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2165
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2181
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2201
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2182
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2202
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2183
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2273
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2184
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2274
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2186
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
Q2301
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2187
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
Q2302
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2189
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
Q2363
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2201
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
Q2364
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2202
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
Q2401
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2205
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
Q2431
2SD1328/ST/-X
TRANSISTOR
R2206
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R 570
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2207
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R 573
NRSA63J-432X
MG RESISTOR
R2208
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
Remarks
Area
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (DSP board)
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Block No. 05
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
R2221
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2506
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2222
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2507
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2225
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2508
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2226
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2511
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2512
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2513
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2514
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2515
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2227
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2231
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2232
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2233
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2516
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2234
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2517
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2235
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2518
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2236
NRSA63J-333X
MG RESISTOR
R2519
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2237
NRSA63J-683X
MG RESISTOR
R2520
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2238
NRSA63J-683X
MG RESISTOR
R2521
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2257
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2522
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2523
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2531
NRSA63F-511X
MG RESISTOR
R2532
NRSA63F-102X
MG RESISTOR
R2551
NRSA63J-183X
MG RESISTOR
R2258
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2261
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2262
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2263
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2552
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2264
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2553
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2273
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2554
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2274
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2555
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2275
NRSA63J-682X
MG RESISTOR
R2557
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2276
NRSA63J-682X
MG RESISTOR
R2559
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2277
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
R2560
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2278
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
R2561
NRSA63J-112X
MG RESISTOR
R2562
NRSA63J-112X
MG RESISTOR
R2563
NRSA63J-112X
MG RESISTOR
R2564
NRSA63J-750X
MG RESISTOR
R2283
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2284
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2285
NRSA63J-113X
MG RESISTOR
R2568
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2286
NRSA63J-113X
MG RESISTOR
R2571
NRSA63J-512X
MG RESISTOR
R2301
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2572
NRSA63J-512X
MG RESISTOR
R2302
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2573
NRSA63J-512X
MG RESISTOR
R2305
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R2581
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2306
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R2582
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2307
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2583
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2308
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2584
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2585
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2586
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2587
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2589
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2349
NRSA63J-303X
MG RESISTOR
R2350
NRSA63J-303X
MG RESISTOR
R2351
NRSA63J-113X
MG RESISTOR
R2352
NRSA63J-113X
MG RESISTOR
R2591
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2353
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
R2593
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2354
NRSA63J-222X
MG RESISTOR
R2594
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2355
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2595
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2356
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2596
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2357
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
R2597
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R2358
NRSA63J-223X
MG RESISTOR
R2611
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2359
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2612
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2613
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2614
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2615
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2360
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2363
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2364
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2616
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2401
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2701
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2405
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R2702
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2407
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2703
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
R2425
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2709
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2427
NRSA63J-104X
MG RESISTOR
R2715
NRSA63J-432X
MG RESISTOR
R2429
NRSA63J-103X
MG RESISTOR
R2716
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2431
NRSA63J-113X
MG RESISTOR
R2717
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R2718
NRSA63J-221X
MG RESISTOR
UN560
GP1FA550TZ
OPT TRANSMITTER
UN561
GP1FA550RZ
OPT RECEIVER
UN562
GP1FA550RZ
OPT RECEIVER
R2433
NRSA63J-823X
MG RESISTOR
R2485
NRSA63J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R2501
NRSA63J-105X
MG RESISTOR
R2502
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
UN563
GP1FA550RZ
OPT RECEIVER
R2503
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
X 581
NAX0275-001X
1COSCIALLATOR
R2504
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
X2501
NAX0308-001X
CRYSTAL
R2505
NRSA63J-473X
MG RESISTOR
X2551
NAX0213-001X
CRYSTAL
Remarks
Area
3-17
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Micon board)
A
A
A
A
A
A
3-18
Item
C 1
Parts number
QCZ9104-472
Parts name
Block No. 06
Remarks
C CAPACITOR
4700PF
C 51
QFLC2AJ-472Z
M CAPA CITOR
4700PF 5% 100V
C 52
QETM1EM-108
E CAPACITOR
1000MF 20% 25V
C 54
QETN1CM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 16V
C 55
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
C 61
QFLC2AJ-104Z
M CAPACITOR
.10MF 5% 100V
C 62
QFLC2AJ-104Z
M CAPACITOR
C 63
QFLC2AJ-104Z
C 65
C 66
Area
A
Item
D 56
Parts number
MTZJ6.2B-T2
D 57
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 61
10E2-FD
DIODE
D 62
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
D 63
10E2-FD
DIODE
D 64
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
.10MF 5% 100V
D 67
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
M CAPACITOR
.10MF 5% 100V
D 71
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
QETM1VM-338
E CAPACITOR
3300MF 20% 35V
D 72
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
QETM1VM-108
E CAPACITOR
1000MF 20% 35V
D 73
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
C 68
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
D 74
MTZJ33C-T2
Z DIODE
C 69
QFLC1HJ-473Z
M CAPACITOR
.047MF 5% 50V
D 75
MTZJ8.2C-T2
ZENER DIODE
C 70
QETN1HM-227Z
E CAPACITOR
220MF 20% 50V
D 900
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
C 71
QETN1JM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 63V
D 901
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
C 72
QETN1HM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 50V
D 902
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
C 73
QETN1HM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 50V
D 904
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 74
QETN1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
D 921
MTZJ5.6C-T2
ZENER DIODE
A
A
A
A
Remarks
Parts name
ZENER DIODE
C 901
QETN0JM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 6.3V
D 931
MTZJ6.2C-T2
Z DIODE
C 902
QCZ0205-155Z
ML C CAPACITOR
1.5MF
D 941
MTZJ5.6C-T2
ZENER DIODE
C 903
QETN0JM-228Z
E CAPACITOR
2200MF 20% 6.3V
D 951
MTZJ13C-T2
ZENER DIODE
C 904
QETN1HM-225Z
E CAPACITOR
2.2MF 20% 50V
D 961
MTZJ13C-T2
ZENER DIODE
C 905
QDVB1EZ-223Y
C CAPACITOR
D 971
MTZJ10C-T2
Z DIODE
C 921
QETN1EM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 25V
D 975
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 922
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
D 976
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 931
QETN1EM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 25V
D 977
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 932
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
D 978
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 941
QETN1EM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 25V
D 979
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 942
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
D 993
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
C 951
QETN1EM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 25V
EP 1
E409182-001SM
GRAND TERMINAL
C 952
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
EP 51
QNZ0136-001Z
EARTH PLATE
C 961
QETN1EM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 25V
EP 91
E406523-001SM
GND BKT
C 962
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
EP901
QNZ0136-001Z
EARTH PLATE
C 971
QETN1EM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 25V
FC 1
QNG0020-001Z
FUSE CLIP
F001
C 972
QCF31HZ-472Z
C CAPACITOR
4700PF +80:-20%
FC 2
QNG0020-001Z
FUSE CLIP
F001
C 975
QETN0JM-477Z
E CAPACITOR
470MF 20% 6.3V
FC 61
QNG0020-001Z
FUSE CLIP
F061
C 981
QCBB1HK-331Y
C CAPACITOR
330PF 10% 50V
FC 62
QNG0020-001Z
FUSE CLIP
F061
C 982
QCBB1HK-331Y
C CAPACITOR
330PF 10% 50V
FC 63
QNG0020-001Z
FUSE CLIP
F062
C 983
QCBB1HK-331Y
C CAPACITOR
330PF 10% 50V
FC 64
QNG0020-001Z
FUSE CLIP
F062
C 984
QCBB1HK-331Y
C CAPACITOR
330PF 10% 50V
FL991
QQR0590-001
FILTER
C 985
QCBB1HK-103Y
C CAPACITOR
.010MF 10% 50V
FL992
QQR0590-001
FILTER
C 991
QFLC1HJ-562Z
M CAPACITOR
5600PF 5% 50V
FW 51
QUM137-10DGZ4
PARA RIBON WIRE
C 992
QFLC1HJ-562Z
M CAPACITOR
5600PF 5% 50V
FW831
QUM134-08DGZ4
PARA RIBON WIRE
C 993
QCBB1HK-101Y
C CAPACITOR
100PF 10% 50V
FW881
QUM133-44DGZ4
PARA RIBON WIRE
C 994
QCBB1HK-271Y
C CAPACITOR
270PF 10% 50V
HL901
VYH7237-002
IC HOLDER
CN 55
QGD2501C1-03Z
SOCKET
HS921
E70945-H40B
HEAT SINK
CN 56
QGD2501C1-04Z
SOCKET
HS931
E70945-H40B
HEAT SINK
CN 71
QGB2510J1-11
CONNECTOR
HS941
E70945-H40B
HEAT SINK
CN 81
QGB2510J1-09
CONNECTOR
HS951
E70306-001
HEAT SINK
CN101
QGB2501J1-12
CONNECTOR
HS961
E70306-001
HEAT SINK
CN201
QGB2510J1-11
CONNECTOR
HS971
E70306-001
HEAT SINK
CN241
QGB2510J1-12
CONNECTOR
IC901
MN101C49GHM
IC
CN301
QGB2510J1-14
CONNECTOR
IC903
IC-PST9139-T
IC
CN303
QGB2510J1-13
CONNECTOR
J 91
QNS0022-001
JACK
CN400
QGF1205C1-10
CONNECTOR
Q 52
KTD863/Y/-T
TRANSISTOR
CN402
QGF1205C1-08
CONNECTOR
Q 53
KRC105M-T
D TRANSISTOR
CN601
QGB2510J1-07
CONNECTOR
Q 61
KRC105M-T
D TRANSISTOR
CN811
QGA3901F2-03
CONNECTOR
Q 71
KTA1046/Y/
TRANSISTOR
CN931
QGD2501C1-04Z
SOCKET
Q 74
KTC3200/GL/-T
TRANSISTOR
CN932
QGD2501C1-03Z
SOCKET
Q 901
KRC107M-T
D TRANSISTOR
D 51
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
Q 903
KRC105M-T
D TRANSISTOR
D 52
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
Q 904
KRC105M-T
D TRANSISTOR
D 53
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
Q 905
KRC105M-T
D TRANSISTOR
D 54
1SR35-400A-T5
DIODE
Q 906
KRC105M-T
D TRANSISTOR
A
Area
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Micon board)
A
Item
Q 907
A
A
A
A
A
A
Parts number
KRC105M-T
Parts name
Block No. 06
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
Remarks
D TRANSISTOR
R 973
QRJ146J-332X
UNF C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
Q 908
KRC105M-T
D TRANSISTOR
R 975
QRJ146J-220X
UNF C RESISTOR
22 5% 1/4W
Q 921
2SD2395/EF/
TRANSISTOR
R 976
QRE141J-472Y
C RESISTOR
4.7K 5% 1/4W
Q 931
2SD2395/EF/
TRANSISTOR
R 977
QRE141J-472Y
C RESISTOR
4.7K 5% 1/4W
Q 941
2SD2395/EF/
TRANSISTOR
R 978
QRE141J-472Y
C RESISTOR
4.7K 5% 1/4W
Q 951
2SD2395/EF/
TRANSISTOR
R 979
QRE141J-472Y
C RESISTOR
4.7K 5% 1/4W
Q 961
KTA1046/Y/
TRANSISTOR
R 980
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
Q 971
2SD2395/EF/
TRANSISTOR
R 981
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 1
QRZ9044-335
COMP RESISTOR
3.3M 1/0W
R 982
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 53
QRJ146J-6R8X
UNF C RESISTOR
6.8 5% 1/4W
R 983
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 54
QRE141J-821Y
C RESISTOR
820 5% 1/4W
R 984
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 61
QRJ146J-3R3X
UNF C RESISTOR
3.3 5% 1/4W
R 985
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 67
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
R 986
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 72
QRJ146J-332X
UNF C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R 987
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 73
QRE141J-223Y
C RESISTOR
22K 5% 1/4W
R 991
QRE141J-472Y
C RESISTOR
4.7K 5% 1/4W
R 74
QRE141J-104Y
C RESISTOR
100K 5% 1/4W
R 992
QRE141J-472Y
C RESISTOR
4.7K 5% 1/4W
R 91
QRL022J-471
UNF OMF RESISTOR
470 5% 1/2W
R 993
QRE141J-622Y
C RESISTOR
6.2K 5% 1/4W
R 92
QRL022J-471
UNF OMF RESISTOR
470 5% 1/2W
R 994
QRE141J-512Y
C RESISTOR
5.1K 5% 1/4W
R 903
QRE141J-331Y
C RESISTOR
330 5% 1/4W
R 995
QRE141J-133Y
C RESISTOR
13K 5% 1/4W
R 908
QRE141J-223Y
C RESISTOR
22K 5% 1/4W
R 996
QRE141J-332Y
C RESISTOR
3.3K 5% 1/4W
R 910
QRE141J-223Y
C RESISTOR
22K 5% 1/4W
R 997
QRE141J-153Y
C RESISTOR
15K 5% 1/4W
R 911
QRE141J-472Y
C RESISTOR
4.7K 5% 1/4W
R 998
QRE141J-562Y
C RESISTOR
5.6K 5% 1/4W
R 915
QRT022J-8R2
UNF MF RESISTOR
8.2 5% 1/2W
R 999
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 916
QRT022J-8R2
UNF MF RESISTOR
8.2 5% 1/2W
RY 1
QSK0098-001
RELAY
R 921
QRK126J-330X
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
RY 62
QSK0088-001
RELAY
R 922
QRK126J-330X
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
RY 63
QSK0088-001
RELAY
R 923
QRJ146J-272X
UNF C RESISTOR
2.7K 5% 1/4W
T 2
QQT0317-001
POWER TRANSF
R 924
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
TA 1
QNZ0079-001Z
TAB
R 925
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
TA 2
QNZ0079-001Z
TAB
R 926
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
TH 71
QAD0095-4R7Z
POSISTOR
R 927
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
X 901
QAX0246-001Z
RESONATOR
R 928
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 929
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 930
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 931
QRL017J-430
UNF OMF RESISTOR
43 5% 1/1W
R 932
QRL017J-430
UNF OMF RESISTOR
43 5% 1/1W
R 933
QRJ146J-272X
UNF C RESISTOR
2.7K 5% 1/4W
R 937
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 938
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 939
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 940
QRJ146J-4R7X
UNF C RESISTOR
4.7 5% 1/4W
R 941
QRK126J-330X
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
R 942
QRK126J-330X
UNF C RESISTOR
33 5% 1/2W
R 943
QRJ146J-272X
UNF C RESISTOR
2.7K 5% 1/4W
R 944
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 945
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 946
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 947
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 948
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 949
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 951
QRK126J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/2W
R 953
QRJ146J-222X
UNF C RESISTOR
2.2K 5% 1/4W
R 954
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 955
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 956
QRE141J-221Y
C RESISTOR
220 5% 1/4W
R 961
QRK126J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/2W
R 963
QRJ146J-222X
UNF C RESISTOR
2.2K 5% 1/4W
R 965
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 966
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 967
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 968
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 969
QRE141J-103Y
C RESISTOR
10K 5% 1/4W
R 971
QRJ146J-120X
UNF C RESISTOR
12 5% 1/4W
A
A
A
Area
3-19
RX-8010VBK
Electrical parts list (Tuner board)
A
3-20
Item
Parts number
AT101
QNB0014-001
BK 1
C 101
Parts name
Block No. 07
Remarks
Area
A
Item
Parts number
Parts name
ANT TERMINAL
R 115
NRSA02J-104X
MG RESISTOR
LV31618-001A
SHIELD BKT
R 119
NRSA02J-103X
MG RESISTOR
NCB21HK-103X
C CAPACITOR
R 122
NRSA02J-472X
MG RESISTOR
C 103
NCB21HK-223X
C CAPACITOR
R 124
NRSA02J-222X
MG RESISTOR
C 105
NCB21HK-223X
C CAPACITOR
R 126
NRSA02J-562X
MG RESISTOR
C 107
QEKC1CM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
R 127
NRSA02J-822X
MG RESISTOR
C 111
NCB21HK-473X
C CAPACITOR
R 128
NRSA02J-472X
MG RESISTOR
C 112
NDC21HJ-120X
C CAPACITOR
R 129
NRSA02J-222X
MG RESISTOR
C 121
NDC21HJ-120X
C CAPACITOR
R 130
QRZ9005-680X
F RESISTOR
C 122
NDC21HJ-120X
C CAPACITOR
R 132
NRSA02J-393X
MG RESISTOR
C 123
NCB21HK-473X
C CAPACITOR
R 133
NRSA02J-392X
MG RESISTOR
C 126
NCS21HJ-101X
C CAPACITOR
R 134
NRSA02J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 128
QENC1HM-474Z
NP E CAPACITOR
R 140
NRSA02J-183X
MG RESISTOR
C 129
NCB21HK-102X
C CAPACITOR
R 141
NRSA02J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 130
QEKC1AM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 10V
R 142
NRSA02J-470X
MG RESISTOR
C 133
QEKC1CM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 16V
R 143
NRSA02J-562X
MG RESISTOR
C 134
NCB21HK-222X
C CAPACITOR
R 144
NRSA02J-332X
MG RESISTOR
C 135
NCB21HK-223X
C CAPACITOR
R 145
NRSA02J-103X
MG RESISTOR
C 136
QEKC1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
R 146
NRSA02J-392X
MG RESISTOR
C 137
NCB21HK-331X
C CAPACITOR
R 147
NRSA02J-332X
MG RESISTOR
C 138
NCB21HK-473X
C CAPACITOR
R 150
NRSA02J-331X
MG RESISTOR
C 139
NCB21HK-333X
C CAPACITOR
R 157
NRSA02J-682X
MG RESISTOR
C 140
NCB21HK-333X
C CAPACITOR
R 158
NRSA02J-682X
MG RESISTOR
C 141
NCB21HK-473X
C CAPACITOR
R 161
NRSA02J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 143
NCB21HK-223X
C CAPACITOR
R 162
NRSA02J-102X
MG RESISTOR
C 144
NCB21HK-473X
C CAPACITOR
R 182
NRSA02J-103X
MG RESISTOR
C 146
QEKC1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
R 183
NRSA02J-103X
MG RESISTOR
C 147
QEKC1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
R 184
NRSA02J-103X
MG RESISTOR
C 148
QEKC1HM-224Z
E CAPACITOR
.22MF 20% 50V
RF101
QAU0124-002
FRONT END
C 149
QEKC1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
T 111
QQR0796-001
COIL BLOCK
C 150
QEKC1CM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 16V
T 142
QQR0973-001
IFT
C 156
QDGB1HK-102Y
C CAPACITOR
X 121
QAX0402-001
CRYSTAL
22MF 20% 16V
A
.47MF 20% 50V
1.0MF 20% 50V
C 157
NCB21HK-473X
C CAPACITOR
C 158
QEKC1CM-226Z
E CAPACITOR
22MF 20% 16V
C 161
QEK41CM-106
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 16V
C 162
QEK41CM-106
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 16V
C 163
NCB21HK-223X
C CAPACITOR
C 164
NCB21HK-473X
C CAPACITOR
C 168
QEKC1HM-105Z
E CAPACITOR
1.0MF 20% 50V
C 184
QEKC1CM-107Z
E CAPACITOR
100MF 20% 16V
C 185
QEK41CM-106
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 16V
C 186
QEK41CM-106
E CAPACITOR
10MF 20% 16V
CF101
QAX0419-001Z
C FILTER
CF102
QAX0604-001Z
C FILTER
CF103
QAX0519-001Z
C FILTER
CN111
QGB2501K2-12
CONECTOR
D 121
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 123
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 124
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 125
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
D 129
1SS133-T2
SI DIODE
IC102
LA1838
IC
IC121
LC72136N
IC
Q 102
2SC535/BC/-T
TRANSISTOR
Q 103
2SC461/BC/-T
TRANSISTOR
Q 121
KRA103M-T
TRANSISTOR
R 103
NRSA02J-221X
MG RESISTOR
R 104
NRSA02J-272X
MG RESISTOR
R 105
NRSA02J-391X
MG RESISTOR
R 106
NRSA02J-102X
MG RESISTOR
R 107
NRSA02J-391X
MG RESISTOR
R 108
NRSA02J-332X
MG RESISTOR
R 109
NRSA02J-221X
MG RESISTOR
FM+B
Remarks
68 1/0W
Area
RX-8010VBK
Packing materials and accessories parts list
Block No. M 2 M M
Block No. M 3 M M
P1
A2~A7
P4
1/2
A1
P3
P5
P4
1/2
2/2
P6
P5
P3
2/2
P2
Parts list (Packing)
A
Item
Block No. M2MM
Parts number
Parts name
Q'ty
Description
P 1
QPA02503505P
POLY BAG
1
P 2
LV20989-010A
CARTON BOX
1
P 3
LV32034-003A
SHEET
2
P 4
LV20947-001A
PACKING PAD
1
P 5
LV20948-001A
PACKING PAD
1
P 6
QPC06507015P
POLY BAG
1
FOR SET
Parts list (Accessories)
A
Item
Parts number
Area
FOR INST
Block No. M3MM
Parts name
Q'ty
Description
A 1
RM-SRX8010J
REMOCON
1
A 2
-----------
BATTERY
1
A 3
LVT0618-001B
INST BOOK
1
A 4
EWP503-001C
ANT.WIRE
1
A 5
QAL0204-001
AM LOOP ANT
1
A 6
BT-51020-2
J=REGIST CARD
1
A 7
YU20333
SAFETY INST.
1
Area
ENG
3-21
RX-8010VBK
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
AUDIO & COMMUNICATION BUSINESS DIVISION
PERSONAL & MOBILE NETWORK BUSINESS UNIT. 10-1,1chome,Ohwatari-machi,Maebashi-city,371-8543,Japan
(No.20921)
Printed in Japan
200103(V)
AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
RX-8010VBK
CATV/DBS VCR 1
TV
AUDIO
POWER
POWER
POWER
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
VCR 1
SURROUND
ON/OFF
USB
DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
MODE
BASS
LINE DIF.ECT BOOST
INPUT
EFFECT
ROOM
SIZE
2
3
1
RX-8010V
MENU
MIDNIGHT
MODE
TEST
FM/AM TUNING
CTR TONE LIVENESS
4
5
∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
8
0
10
RETURN
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
TV/VIDEO
+
FM MODE
∗BAL L
∗
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
∗BAL R
MENU
STANDBY
−
PLAY
POWER
D I G I T A L
SURROUND
100+
D I G I T A L
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
+
SURROUND ON/OFF
VOLUME
−
EXIT
MASTER VOLUME
MEMORY
9
+10
DSP MODE
/REW
PAUSE
INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
TV SOUND/DBS
DIGITAL LEVEL
EQ
ADJUST
LINE DIRECT
EFFECT SETTING
BASS BOOST
INPUT ATT
SOUCE NAME
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
VIDEO
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
FM / AM
FF/
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
SET
REC
PAUSE
VIDEO
MIDNIGHT MODE
2
S-VIDEO
TEXT
DISPLAY
AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
FM MODE
6
ENTER
SOUND
MUTING
7/P
FM/AM PRESET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SOUCE NAME
STOP CONTROL
PHONES
RM-SRX8010J
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
D I G I T A L
INSTRUCTIONS
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial
No. which are located either on the rear,
bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.
LVT0618-001A
[J]
RX-8010V[J]COVER_f
1
01.1.11, 5:56 PM
Warnings, Cautions and Others/
Mises en garde, précautions et indications diverses
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE
OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
RX-8010VBK
Trade Name:
JVC
Responsible Party: JVC Americas Corp.
Address:
1700 Valley Road, Wayne
New Jersey 07470
Telephone Number: 973-315-5000
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Déclaration de conformité
Numéro de modèle:
RX-8010VBK
Nom de marque:
JVC
Personne responsable: US JVC CORP.
Adresse:
1700 Valley Road
Wayne, N.J. 07470
Numéro de téléphone: (973) 315-5000
Cet ensemble se conforme à la partie 15 des règles de la FCC
(Federal Communications Commission), Le fonctionnement est sujet
aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) Cet appareil ne peut pas causer d’interférences nuisibles, et (2)
cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, comprenant
des interférences qui peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
ATTENTION
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution, d’incendie, etc.:
1. Ne pas enlever les vis ni les panneaux et ne pas ouvrir le
coffret de l’appareil.
2. Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité.
Caution –– POWER switch!
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The
POWER switch in any position does not disconnect the mains
line. The power can be remote controlled.
Attention –– Commutateur POWER!
Déconnecter la fiche de secteur pour couper complètement le
courant. Le commutateur POWER ne coupe jamais
complètement la ligne de secteur, quelle que soit sa position. Le
courant peut être télécommandé.
Caution –– SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch!
Match the position of SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the
back panel to the impedance of the speaker connected, to protect
from overheating.
G-1
RX-8010V[J]Safety_f
1
01.1.11, 5:57 PM
For Canada/pour Le Canada
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS
B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL
APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING
EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED “DIGITAL APPARATUS,”
ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE
BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS
NUMERIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME
SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR; “APPAREILS
NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE MINISTRE DES
COMMUNICATIONS.
For Canada/pour le Canada
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQUAU FOND
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoide risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.
Locate the apparatus as follows:
Front:
No obstructions open spacing.
Sides:
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.
Top:
No obstructions in 10 cm from the top.
Back:
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back
Bottom:
No obstructions, place on the level surface.
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.
Attention: Ventilation Correcte
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, l’incendie et tout autre dégât.
Disposer l’appareil en tenant compte des impératifs suivants
Avant:
Rien ne doit gêner le dégagement
Flancs:
Laisser 10 cm de dégagement latéral
Dessus:
Laisser 10 cm de dégagement supérieur
Arrière:
Laisser 15 cm de dégagement arrière
Dessous:
Rien ne doit obstruer par dessous; poser l’appareil
sur une surface plate.
Veiller également à ce que l’air circule le mieux possible comme
illustré.
Spacing 15 cm or more
Dégagement de 15 cm
ou plus
RX-8010VBK
Wall or obstructions
Mur, ou obstruction
Front
Avant
Stand height 15 cm or more
Hauteur du socle: 15 cm ou plus
Floor
Plancher
G-2
RX-8010V[J]Safety_f
2
01.1.11, 5:57 PM
Table of Contents
Parts Identification ...................................... 2
Creating a Surround Field in Your Room ....... 24
Getting Started ........................................... 3
7 Surround modes .................................................................... 24
7 DSP modes ........................................................................... 24
Reproducing the Sound Field .................................................... 25
Available DSP Modes According to the Speaker Arrangement .. 26
Adjusting the Surround Modes ................................................ 27
Adjusting the DAP Modes ....................................................... 28
Adjusting the Surround Modes with the DAP Modes .............. 30
Adjusting the 5 CH/4 CH Stereo Mode ................................... 32
Adjusting the 3D-PHONIC Modes .......................................... 33
Before Installation ...................................................................... 3
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................................... 3
Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ....................................... 3
Connecting the Speakers ............................................................ 4
Connecting Audio/Video Components ....................................... 5
7 Analog Connections ............................................................... 5
7 Digital Connections ................................................................ 8
7 USB Connection ..................................................................... 9
Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................... 10
Putting Batteries in the Remote Control .................................. 10
Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......... 35
Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......................... 35
Basic Operations ....................................... 11
Turning the Power On and Off (Standby) ................................ 11
Selecting the Source to Play ..................................................... 11
Adjusting the Volume ............................................................... 12
Selecting the Front Speakers .................................................... 13
Muting the Sound ..................................................................... 13
Listening at Night — Midnight Mode ..................................... 13
Activating the Subwoofer Sound ............................................. 14
Reinforcing the Bass ................................................................ 14
Attenuating the Input Signal .................................................... 14
Selecting the Line Direct Function .......................................... 14
Adjusting the Equalization Patterns ......................................... 15
Using the Sleep Timer .............................................................. 15
Recording a Source .................................................................. 15
Basic Settings ........................................... 16
Adjusting the Front Speaker Output Balance ........................... 16
Changing the Source Name ...................................................... 16
Selecting the Video Input Terminal .......................................... 16
Setting the Subwoofer Information .......................................... 17
Adjusting the Subwoofer Output Level .................................... 17
Setting the Speakers for a Surround Field ................................ 17
Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting ......................... 19
Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ............................ 20
Showing the Text Information on the Display ......................... 21
Basic Setting and Adjustment — Auto Memory ...................... 21
Using the On-Screen Menus ........................ 36
7 Showing the MENU on the TV Screen ................................ 36
7 Activating the Surround Modes ............................................ 36
7 Activating the DSP Modes ................................................... 36
7 Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ........................... 36
7 Adjusting the Equalization Pattern ....................................... 37
7 Adjusting the Surround and DSP Modes .............................. 37
7 Adjusting the DVD MULTI Playback Mode ........................ 38
7 Listening at Night — Midnight Mode .................................. 38
7 Attenuating the Input Signal ................................................. 38
7 Selecting the Line Direct Function ....................................... 39
7 Selecting the Bass Boost Function ....................................... 39
7 Activating the Subwoofer Sound .......................................... 39
7 Operating the Tuner .............................................................. 39
7 Storing the Preset Stations .................................................... 39
7 Setting the Basic Setting Items ............................................. 40
COMPU LINK Remote Control System ......... 41
TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System .. 42
7 Showing the Disc Information on the TV Screen ................. 43
7 Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player) .................... 44
7 Entering the Disc Information .............................................. 45
AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System .... 47
Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components ... 49
Receiving Radio Broadcasts ........................ 22
Tuning in Stations Manually .................................................... 22
Using Preset Tuning ................................................................. 22
Selecting the FM Reception Mode ........................................... 23
Operating Audio Components .................................................. 49
Operating Video Components .................................................. 51
Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video
Equipment ............................................ 52
Troubleshooting ......................................... 55
Specifications ............................................ 57
1
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
1
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
Parts Identification
Become familiar with the buttons and controls on the receiver before use.
Refer to the pages in parentheses for details.
1
3 4 567 8
2
RX-8010V
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM PRESET
pq w
9
er
t
y
AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
FM MODE
ANALOG
STANDBY
L
C
R
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
DIGITAL
LS
S
PRO LOGIC AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO
DSP 3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE
LINEAR PCM SUBWFR LFE
MEMORY
POWER
SPEAKERS
1 2
D I G I T A L
MASTER VOLUME
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION
RS
SLEEP VOLUME
D I G I T A L
SURROUND
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
DSP MODE
SURROUND ON/OFF
INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
MIDNIGHT MODE
DIGITAL LEVEL
ADJUST
EQ
LINE DIRECT
EFFECT SETTING
BASS BOOST
2
INPUT ATT
SOURCE NAME
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
VIDEO
USB AUDIO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
FM / AM
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
SOURCE NAME
PHONES
u i o ;
a
1
a
2
b
CATV/DBS
POWER
VCR 1
TV
AUDIO
POWER
POWER
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
SURROUND
DSP
3
4
5
6
7
ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
ON/OFF
MODE
INPUT
LINE DIF.ECT
BASS
BOOST
EFFECT
1
2
MIDNIGHT
MODE
TEST
CTR TONE
LIVENESS
4
5
6
8
9
0
=
~
!
ROOM
SIZE
3
MENU
ENTER
SOUND
∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
8
7/P
MUTING
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
TV/VIDEO
10
0
+10
RETURN
FM MODE
100+
+
∗BAL L
∗
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
∗BAL R
/REW
VOLUME
−
−
PLAY
EXIT
$
%
^
&
*
FF/
PAUSE
(
SET
REC
PAUSE
#
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
MENU
TEXT
DISPLAY
9
@
DOWN – TUNING – UP
)
STOP CONTROL
RM-SRX8010J
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
s
d
f
g
h
Remote Control
Front Panel
1 Display window (11)
a. Remote control operation mode indicator
b. Signal transmission indicator
Lights up when transmitting the remote
control signal.
2 POWER buttons (11, 51, 52 – 54)
CATV/DBS, VCR 1, TV, AUDIO
3 Source selecting buttons (11)
DVD, DVD MULTI, CD, FM/AM, TV/DBS,VIDEO,
CDR, PHONO, VCR 1, VCR 2, TAPE/MD, USB
4 SURROUND ON/OFF button (26)
5 DSP MODE button (26)
6 LINE DIRECT button (14)
7 MIDNIGHT MODE button (13)
8 SOUND button (14, 16, 27 – 35, 49)
9 MUTING button (13)
0 CATV/DBS CONTROL button (53)
- TV/VIDEO button (51, 52)
= MENU button (36 – 40)
~ TEXT DISPLAY button (43 – 46)
! REC PAUSE button (50, 51, 53)
@ SLEEP button (15)
# ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (20)
$ • 10 keys for selecting preset channels (23)
• 10 keys for adjusting sound (14, 16, 27 – 35,
49)
• 10 keys for operating audio/video components
(49 – 54 )
% • LEVEL +/– buttons* (15, 27 – 35)
• BAL L and BAL R buttons* (16)
• CH +/– buttons (51 – 53)
^ TV VOL +/– buttons (51, 52)
& VOLUME +/– buttons (12)
* EXIT button (36 – 40, 43 – 45)
( • TUNING UP 3/DOWN 2 buttons (22, 49)
• On screen operate buttons (36 – 40, 43 – 46)
• Operating buttons for audio/video components
(49 – 54)
) CONTROL button (50, 51)
1 POWER button and STANDBY lamp (11)
2 • SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 button (13)
• SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 button (13)
3 FM/AM TUNING 5/∞ buttons (22)
4 DSP MODE button and lamp (26)
5 FM/AM PRESET 5/∞ buttons (22, 23)
6 • INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL button (20)
• INPUT ATT button (14)
7 FM MODE button (23)
8 MEMORY button (22)
9 Display (11)
p EFFECT button (28, 31 – 34)
q DIGITAL EQ button (15)
w Remote sensor (10)
e LEVEL ADJUST button (16, 17, 28 – 35)
r SETTING button (16 – 19, 21)
t MASTER VOLUME control (12)
y LINE DIRECT button and lamp (14)
u PHONES jack (13)
i SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF button (14)
o SURROUND ON/OFF button and lamp (26)
; USB AUDIO terminal (9)
a VIDEO input terminals (7)
s MIDNIGHT MODE button (13)
d Source selecting buttons and lamps (11)
DVD MULTI, DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV
SOUND/DBS, PHONO, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD,
USB AUDIO, FM/AM
f SOURCE NAME buttons (16)
g CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ buttons
h BASS BOOST button and lamp (14)
* These buttons function only after pressing
10 keys on the remote control which are
marked with an asterisk (*).
2
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
2
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
Getting Started
This section explains how to connect audio/video components and speakers to the receiver, and how to connect the
power supply.
Before Installation
Connecting the FM and AM Antennas
FM Antenna Connections
General
• Be sure your hands are dry.
• Turn the power off to all components.
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going to
connect.
A
A
NN
TE
AN
B
75
FMAXIAL
A
NN
TE
AN
CO
75
FMAXIAL
CO
Locations
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from
moisture.
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚ C and
35˚ C (23˚ F and 95˚ F).
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.
AMP
O
LO
AM
T
EX
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.
ANTENNA
FM 75
COAXIAL
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or
cabinet.
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.
Check to be sure you have all of the following items, which are
supplied with the receiver.
The number in the parentheses indicates quantity of the pieces
supplied.
• Remote Control (1)
AM
LOOP
Outdoor FM Antenna Cable
AM
EXT
A. Using the Supplied FM Antenna
The FM antenna provided can be connected to the FM 75 Ω
COAXIAL terminal as temporary measure.
B. Using the Standard Type Connector (Not Supplied)
A standard type connector should be connected to the FM 75 Ω
COAXIAL terminal.
• Batteries (2)
• AM Loop Antenna (1)
Note:
• FM Antenna (1)
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.
If reception is poor, connect the outdoor antenna.
Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable (the kind with a round wire
going to an outdoor antenna), disconnect the supplied FM antenna.
3
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
AM
T
EX
FM Antenna
Handling the receiver
Checking the Supplied Accessories
AMP
O
LO
3
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
Basic connecting procedure
AM Antenna Connections
Snap the tabs on the loop into the
slots of the base to assemble the
AM loop.
ANTENNA
FM 75
COAXIAL
AM
LOOP
AM Loop Antenna
AM
EXT
2
1
4
3
1 Cut, twist and remove the insulation at the end of
each speaker signal cable (not supplied).
2 Turn the knob counterclockwise.
1
2
3
3 Insert the speaker signal cable.
4 Turn the knob clockwise.
Connecting the front speakers
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Turn the loop until you have the best reception.
You can connect two pairs of front speakers (one pair to the FRONT
SPEAKERS 1 terminals, and another pair to the FRONT
SPEAKERS 2 terminals).
FRONT SPEAKERS 1
Right speaker
Left speaker
Notes:
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl, remove
the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the diagram.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord. This could cause poor
reception.
• If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire to
the AM EXT terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna connected.)
1
2
+
CAUTION :
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
Connecting the Speakers
RIGHT
For each speaker (except for a subwoofer), connect the (+) and (–)
terminals on the rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals marked on
the speakers. For connecting a subwoofer, see page 5.
CAUTION:
Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the
speaker terminals.
RIGHT
LEFT
–
You can connect the following speakers:
• Two pairs of front speakers to produce normal stereo sound.
• One pair of rear speakers to enjoy the surround effect.
• One center speaker to produce more effective surround effect (to
emphasize human voices).
• One subwoofer to enhance the bass.
IMPORTANT:
After connecting the speakers listed above, set the speaker
setting information properly to obtain the best possible
Surround and DSP effect. For details, see page 17.
LEFT
FRONT SPEAKERS
Right speaker
4
6
LOW
8
16
HIGH
SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR
FRONT SPEAKERS 2
Left speaker
IMPORTANT:
To obtain the best possible output power from the receiver, and to
prevent the receiver from being overheated, the receiver has the
SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR which has to be set as follows:
• Set it to “HIGH” when the impedance of the front speakers
connected is within the range of 8 Ω to 16 Ω.
• Set it to “LOW” when the impedance of the front speakers
connected is within the range of 4 Ω to 6 Ω.
4
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
4
01.1.12, 3:39 PM
Connecting the rear and center speakers
Connect rear speakers to the REAR SPEAKERS terminals and a
center speaker to the CENTER SPEAKER terminals.
Center speaker
Analog Connections
Audio component connections
Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, and the red plug to the
audio right jack.
CAUTION:
CENTER
SPEAKER
REAR SPEAKERS
+
+
–
–
RIGHT
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer
between the source components and this receiver, the sound output
through this receiver may be distorted.
Turntable
RIGHT
LEFT
CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 8
LEFT
AUDIO
Turntable
16
REAR
Right rear speaker
Left rear speaker
PHONO
CD
Turntable
To audio output
Connecting the subwoofer speaker
OUT
(REC)
You can enhance the bass by connecting a subwoofer.
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the
SUBWOOFER OUT jack on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA
pin plugs (not supplied).
SUBWOOFER
OUT
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
If an earth cable is provided for your
turntable, connect the cable to the
screw marked (H) on the rear panel.
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
Ex.: This connection is for the
turntable with an MM (movingmagnet) type cartridge.
Powered subwoofer
Connecting Audio/Video Components
You can connect the following audio/video components to this
receiver. Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.
Audio Components
• Turntable
• CD player*
• Cassette deck or
MD recorder*
• CD recorder*
• Personal computer (PC)
•
•
•
•
•
Video Components
DVD player*
TV*
DBS tuner*
VCR(s)
Video camera
* You can connect these components using the methods described in
“Analog connections” (to the right), or in “Digital connections” (see
page 8).
Note:
Any turntables incorporating a small-output cartridge such as an MC
(moving-coil) type must be connected to this receiver through a
commercial head amplifier or step-up transformer. Direct connection
may result in insufficient volume.
CD player
RIGHT
LEFT
AUDIO
REAR
PHONO
CD player
CD
OUT
(REC)
To audio output
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
5
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
5
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
Cassette deck or MD recorder
Cassette deck
To audio output
To audio input
RIGHT
AUDIO
LEFT
REAR
Video component connections
Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, the red plug to the
audio right jack, and the yellow plug to the video jack.
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or
component video (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) terminals, connect them using
an S-video cable (not supplied) and/or component video cable (not
supplied). By using these terminals, you can get a better picture
quality in the order — Component video > S-video > Composite
video.
PHONO
IMPORTANT:
CD
OUT
(REC)
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
To audio input
MD recorder
To audio output
Note:
This receiver is equipped with the following video terminals —
composite video, S-video and component video terminals. You can
use any of the three to connect a video component.
However, remember that the video signals from one type of these
input terminals are output only through the video output
terminals of the same type.
Therefore, if a recording video component and a playing video
component are connected to the receiver through the different video
terminals, you cannot record the picture from the playing component
on the recording component. In addition, if the TV and a playing video
component are connected to the receiver through the different video
terminals, you cannot view the playback picture from the playing
component on the TV.
You can connect either a cassette deck or an MD recorder to the
TAPE/MD jacks. When connecting an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD
jacks, change the source name, which will be shown on the display
when selected as the source, to “MD.” See page 16 for details.
VCR(s)
S-VHS (or VHS) VCR
A
C D
CD recorder
B
AUDIO RIGHT
To audio output
To audio input
RIGHT
LEFT
E F
VIDEO
CD recorder
VIDEO
LEFT
S-VIDEO
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
AUDIO
OUT
(REC)
REAR
VCR1
PHONO
IN
(PLAY)
CD
OUT
(REC)
OUT
(REC)
VCR2
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
IN
(PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
(REC)
CDR
A
IN
(PLAY)
B
If your audio components have a COMPU LINK or TEXT
COMPU LINK jack
• See also page 41 for detailed information about the connection and
the COMPU LINK remote control system.
• See also page 42 for detailed information about the connection and
the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system.
Å
ı
Ç
Î
‰
Ï
C
S-VHS (or VHS) VCR
D
E
F
To left/right channel audio output
To left/right channel audio input
To S-video output
To composite video output
To composite video input
To S-video input
6
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
6
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
TV and/or DBS tuner
Video camera
When connecting the TV to the AUDIO jacks (TV SOUND/
DBS), DO NOT connect the TV’s video output to these
video input terminals.
The VIDEO input terminals on the front panel are convenient when
connecting and disconnecting the equipment frequently.
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
VIDEO
AUDIO RIGHT
VIDEO
LEFT
S-VIDEO
DVD COMPONENT VIDEO
To audio
output
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
VCR1
TV
To composite
video output
MONITOR
OUT
OUT
(REC)
A
To S-video output
DBS
PB/CB
Y
PR/CR
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
DVD player
VCR2
IN
(PLAY)
B
D
• When you connect the DVD player with stereo output jacks:
MONITOR
OUT
Å To front left/right channel audio
output (or to audio mixed output if
necessary)
ı To composite video output
Ç To S-video output
Î To component video output
C
Connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT
terminal to view the playback picture from the
other connected video components.
Å
ı
Ç
Î
DVD COMPONENT VIDEO
DBS
DVD player
A
D
C
DVD
To audio output
To composite video input
To S-video input
To component video input
VIDEO
AUDIO RIGHT
VIDEO
LEFT
B
S-VIDEO
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
VIDEO
AUDIO RIGHT
VIDEO
LEFT
DVD COMPONENT VIDEO
S-VIDEO
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
A
DBS
MONITOR
OUT
DBS tuner
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
DBS
D
C
B
• When you connect the DVD player with its analog discrete output
(5.1 CH reproduction) jacks:
Å
ı
Ç
Î
‰
Ï
Ì
To subwoofer output
To center channel audio output
To rear left/right channel audio output
To front left/right channel audio output
To composite video output
DBS
To S-video output
To component video output
DVD player
Å
ı
Ç
Î
DVD COMPONENT VIDEO
G
DVD
To audio output
To composite video output
To S-video output
To component video output
B
A
D
C
F
E
Notes:
• When connecting the DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks,
change the source name, which will be shown on the display when
selected as the source, to “DBS.” See page 16 for details.
• When operating the DBS tuner by using the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system, change the video input terminal setting
correctly. See pages 16 and 47 for details.
VIDEO
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
AUDIO RIGHT
DVD
REAR
VIDEO
LEFT
DVD
FRONT
Note:
When operating the DVD player by using the AV COMPU LINK
remote control system, change the video input terminal setting
correctly. See pages 16 and 47 for details.
7
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
7
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
S-VIDEO
Notes:
Digital Connections
This receiver is equipped with four DIGITAL IN terminals — one
digital coaxial terminal and three digital optical terminals, and one
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
IMPORTANT:
• When connecting the DVD player, digital TV broadcast tuner or
DBS tuner using the digital terminals, you also need to connect it to
the video terminal on the rear. Without connecting it to the video
terminal, you can view no playback picture.
• After connecting the components using the DIGITAL IN terminals,
set the following correctly if necessary.
– Set the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. For
details, see “Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting” on page
19.
– Select the digital input mode correctly. For details, see “Selecting
the Analog or Digital Input Mode” on page 20.
Digital input terminals
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components.
– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player
– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner
– DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder
• When you want to operate the CD player, CD recorder, or MD
recorder using the COMPU LINK remote control system, connect
the target component also as described in “Analog Connections”
(see pages 5 and 6).
• When you want to operate the DVD player using the AV COMPU
LINK remote control system, connect the DVD player also as
described in “Analog Connections” (see page 7).
Digital output terminal
You can connect any digital equipment as follow.
CD recorder
Digital TV
MD recorder
DBS tuner
DBS
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
between digital optical terminals
DVD player
CD player
DVD
MD recorder
CD recorder
When the digital recording
equipment such as an MD recorder
and CD recorder has a digital
optical input terminal, connecting it
to the DIGITAL OUT terminal
enables you to perform digital-todigital recording.
Digital coaxial cable (not supplied)
between digital coaxial terminals
PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL
/DTS
DIGITAL OUT
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
between digital optical terminals
Note:
When the component has a digital
coaxial output terminal, connect it to the
DIGITAL 1 (DVD) terminal, using the
digital coaxial cable (not supplied).
When the component has a digital
optical output terminal, connect it to the
DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV) or
DIGITAL 4 (CDR) terminal, using the
digital optical cable (not supplied).
Before connecting a digital
optical cable, unplug the
protective plug.
The digital signal format output through the DIGITAL OUT terminal is
the same as that of the input signal. This means that when the DTS
Digital Surround signals are input, the DTS Digital Surround signals
are output.
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL 1 (DVD)
DIGITAL 2 (CD)
DIGITAL 3 (TV)
DIGITAL 4 (CDR)
8
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
8
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
USB Connection
This receiver is equipped with a USB terminal on the front panel.
You can connect your PC to this terminal and enjoy sound
reproduced through your PC.
When you connect your PC for the first time, follow the procedure
below.
• Remember you cannot send any signal or data to your PC from
this receiver.
5. Check if the drivers are correctly installed.
1. Open the Control Panel on your PC: Select [Start] =
[Settings] = [Control Panel]
2. Select [System], then [Device Manager] and click [Sound,
video and game controllers] and [Universal Serial Bus
controllers.]
The following window appears, and you can check whether
the drivers are installed.
IMPORTANT
• Check if your PC equipped with the CD-ROM drive is running
on WindowsR 98*, WindowsR Me*, or WindowsR 2000* and
prepare its CD-ROM.
• Check your PC’s BIOS setting — whether USB is available, and
whether USB IRQ is set to “AUTO” or to available IRQ number.
How to install the USB drivers
The following procedure is described using the English version of
WindowsR 98. If your PC is running on a different version of
Windows, the screens shown on your PC’s monitor will differ from
the ones used in the following procedure.
1. Turn on your PC and start running WindowsR 98, WindowsR
Me or WindowsR 2000.
If the PC has been turned on, quit all the applications now running.
2. Turn on the receiver, and press USB AUDIO on the front
panel or USB on the remote control.
The lamp on the USB AUDIO button lights up.
3. Connect the receiver to the PC using a USB cable (not
supplied).
Your PC automatically recognizes this connection, and shows
the following screen on the monitor.
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
The items shown on the PC’s monitor differ
depending on your PC settings.
6. Change the PC audio setting.
1. If you have closed Control Panel, open it again: Select [Start]
= [Settings] = [Control Panel]
2. Click [Multimedia], then select “USB Audio Device [1]” for
“Playback” of “Audio,” and close the window.
To play back a CD from CD-ROM drive on PC, click
[Multimedia], [CD Music] then check [Enable digital CD audio for
this CD-ROM device].
VIDEO
USB AUDIO
Note:
L—AUDIO—R
Now PC is ready for playback through the USB connection.
PC
USB cable
After installation is completed, you can use your PC as the playback
source. The PC automatically recognizes the receiver whenever a
USB cable is connected between the PC and the receiver while the
receiver is turned on.
• When not using the PC as the playback source, disconnect the
USB cable.
To play back sounds on the PC, refer to the manuals supplied with
the sound reproduction application installed in the PC.
Notes:
4. Install the USB drivers following the instructions on the PC’s
monitor.
• DO NOT turn off the receiver or disconnect the USB cable while
installing the drivers and for a several seconds each time your PC is
recognizing the receiver.
• Use a full speed USB cable (revision 1.0).
• If your PC does not recognize the receiver, disconnect the USB
cable and connect it again. If this does not work, restart Windows.
• The drivers installed can be recognized only when the USB cable is
connected between the receiver and your PC.
• The sound may not be played back correctly — interrupted or
degraded — due to your PC settings and PC specifications.
* Microsoft R, WindowsR 98, WindowsR Me and WindowsR 2000 are
registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation.
9
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
9
01.1.11, 6:03 PM
Connecting the Power Cord
Before plugging the receiver into an AC outlet, make sure that all
connections have been made.
Putting Batteries in the Remote Control
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on the receiver.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
1. On the back of the remote control, remove the
battery cover.
Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. We
recommend that you use a coaxial cable to connect the antenna,
since it is well-shielded against interference.
2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the
polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
Note:
The preset settings such as preset channels and sound adjustment
may be erased in a few days in the following cases:
– When you unplug the power cord.
– When a power failure occurs.
R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
CAUTIONS:
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When
unplugging the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage
the cord.
3. Replace the cover.
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace
the batteries. Use two R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell batteries.
Note:
After replacing the batteries, set the manufacturers’ codes again (see
page 52).
CAUTION:
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage.
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.
10
EN01_10.RX-8010V[J]_f
10
01.1.11, 5:51 PM
Basic Operations
The following operations are commonly used when you play any sound source.
Before using the remote control
From the remote control:
How to confirm the remote control operation mode
The display window on the remote control shows following
information for about 10 seconds when you press certain buttons on
the remote control, so that you can confirm which operation you do.
To turn on the power, press AUDIO POWER.
The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off.
The name of the current source and Surround/DSP
mode appear on the display.
To turn off the power (into standby mode), press AUDIO POWER
again. The STANDBY lamp on the front panel lights up.
Pressing one of the source selecting buttons,
the source name selected appears on the
display.
Buttons
FM/AM
CD
PHONO
TAPE/MD
DVD or DVD MULTI
CDR
USB
TV/DBS
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
Indications
TUNER
CD
PHONO
TAPE
DVD
CDR
USB
TV
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
AUDIO
POWER
Selecting the Source to Play
Ex.: When you
press CD.
Press one of the source selecting buttons.
The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.
• The selected source name and Surround/DSP mode also appear on
the display.
On the front panel:
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
TV SOUND/DBS
SOURCE NAME
PHONO
Pressing SOUND before you adjust the sound
effect, “SOUND” appears on the display.
SOURCE NAME
From the remote control:
Pressing TEXT DISPLAY or MENU before
you use on-screen menu or TEXT COMPU
LINK, “MENU” appears on the display (see
pages 36 and 42).
Pressing CONTROL or CATV/DBS
CONTROL before you operate an audio or
video equipment connected to the receiver,
the remote control operation mode selected
appears on the display (see pages 49 and 52).
Ex.: When you
press CATV/
DBS CONTROL.
Turning the Power On and Off (Standby)
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
Selected source name and current
Surround/DSP mode appear
ANALOG
L
C
R
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
LINEAR PCM SUBWFR LFE
DIGITAL
LS
S
L
POWER
R
SPEAKERS
VOLUME
1
Current volume level appears
To turn off the power (into standby mode),
press POWER again.
The STANDBY lamp lights up. A small amount
of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn
the power off completely, unplug the AC power
cord.
STANDBY
POWER
DVD MULTI
11
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONE TOUCH OPERATION
SLEEP VOLUME
Select the DVD player for viewing the digital
video disc using the analog discrete output mode
(5.1CH reproduction).
To enjoy the DVD MULTI playback, see page 35.
DVD
Select the DVD player.
VCR 1
Select the video component connected to the
VCR 1 terminals.
VCR 2
Select the video component connected to the
VCR 2 terminals.
VIDEO
Select video component connected to the
VIDEO terminals.
TV (SOUND)/DBS Select TV sounds (or the DBS tuner).
Select the turntable.
PHONO *
Select the CD player.
CD *
CDR *
Select the CD recorder.
Select the cassette deck (or the MD recorder).
TAPE/MD *
Select the personal computer (PC) connected
USB (AUDIO) *
to the USB terminal.
FM/AM *
Select an FM or AM broadcast.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
11
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
DSP 3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE
STANDBY
Current source name and
Surround/DSP mode appear
ANALOG
PRO LOGIC AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO
RS
SPEAKERS
1 2
On the front panel:
To turn on the power, press POWER.
The STANDBY lamp goes off. The name of the
current source and Surround/DSP mode appear
on the display.
FM / AM
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
On the front panel:
Notes:
• When connecting an MD recorder (to the TAPE/MD jacks), and a
DBS tuner (to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks), change the source
names shown on the display. For details, see page 16.
• When you press one of the source selecting buttons on the remote
control marked with an asterisk (*), the receiver automatically turns
on.
Signal and speaker indicators on the display
The signal indicators light up in the following cases:
• Only the indicators for the incoming signals light up.
• When analog input is selected, “L” and “R” always light up.
• When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, “L,” “C,” “R,”
“LFE,” “LS” and “RS” light up.
The speaker indicators light up only —:
The frames of “C,” “LS,” and “RS” light up, when the
corresponding speaker is set to “LARGE” or “SMALL”.
Signal indicators light up in
red:
L
C
Speaker indicators light up
in white:
R
L
SUBWFR LFE
LS
L:
R:
C:
LS:
RS:
S:
LFE:
S
RS
C
R
SUBWFR LFE
LS
S
RS
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the left
channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
• When digital input is selected: Lights up when the right
channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.
Lights up when the left rear channel signal comes in.
Lights up when the right rear channel signal comes in.
Lights up when the monaural rear channel signal comes in.
Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.
DVD MULTI
TV SOUND/DBS
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
SOURCE NAME
PHONO
FM / AM
SOURCE NAME
From the remote control:
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR 1
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
Note:
Once you have selected a video source, pictures of the selected
source are sent to the TV until you select another video source.
Adjusting the Volume
On the front panel:
To increase the volume, turn MASTER
VOLUME clockwise.
To decrease the volume, turn it
counterclockwise.
• When you turn MASTER VOLUME rapidly,
the volume level also changes rapidly.
• When you turn MASTER VOLUME slowly,
the volume level also changes slowly.
From the remote control:
To increase the volume, press VOLUME +.
To decrease the volume, press VOLUME –.
MASTER VOLUME
+
VOLUME
−
CAUTION:
Note:
When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “YES,”
17).
SUBWFR
lights up (see page
Selecting different sources for picture and
sound
You can watch picture from a video component while listening to
sound from another component.
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any source. If
the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy
can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.
Notes:
• The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0” (minimum)
to “90” (maximum).
• If you set One Touch Operation to “ON” (see page 21), you do not
have to adjust the volume level each time you change the source. It
is automatically set to the stored level.
Press one of the audio source selecting buttons — PHONO, CD,
CDR, TAPE/MD, USB(AUDIO), FM/AM — while viewing the
picture from a video component such as the VCR or DVD player,
etc.
The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.
12
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
12
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Selecting the Front Speakers
Muting the Sound
IMPORTANT:
You can activate two pairs of the front speakers at the same time only
when the SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is
set to “HIGH” and when no signals are sent to the center and rear
speakers. Otherwise, activating one pair of the speakers deactivates
the other.
On the front panel ONLY:
When you have connected two pairs of the front speakers, you can
select which to use.
To use the speakers connected to the
FRONT SPEAKERS 1 terminals, press
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 so that SPEAKERS 1
indicator lights up on the display. Make sure
that the SPEAKERS 2 is not lit on the display.
From the remote control ONLY:
Press MUTING to mute the sound through all
speakers and headphones connected.
“MUTING” appears on the display and the
volume turns off (the volume level indicator goes
off).
To restore the sound, press MUTING again so that “MUTING
OFF” appears on the display.
• Turning MASTER VOLUME on the front panel or pressing
VOLUME +/– on the remote control also restores the sound.
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
Listening at Night — Midnight Mode
2
To use the speakers connected to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2
terminals, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that SPEAKERS 2
indicator lights up on the display. Make sure that the SPEAKERS 1
is not lit on the display.
Using the midnight mode, you can enjoy a powerful sound at night
even at a low volume level.
• You can do this setting for each source.
Press MIDNIGHT MODE to select the midnight mode.
To use both sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and SPEAKERS 2 indicators light up on
the display.
To use neither sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1
and 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and SPEAKERS 2 indicators
disappear from the display.
The HEADPHONE indicator lights up and “HEADPHONE”
appears on the display.
• Activating the speaker turns on the Surround and DSP modes
previously selected.
• Listening only with headphones:
You can listen with the headphones without deactivating both
pairs of speakers by connecting a pair of headphones to the
PHONES jack on the front panel. If you want to use a pair of
headphones without outputting sounds from the front speakers,
you must turn off both pairs of the front speakers as mentioned
above.
Notes:
MIDNIGHT
MODE
MIDNIGHT MODE
On the front panel
From the remote control
• Each time you press the button, the midnight mode changes as
follow.
MIDNIGHT 1
MIDNIGHT 2
NORMAL
MIDNIGHT 1: Select this when you want to compress the
dynamic range a little.
The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights up on the
display.
MIDNIGHT 2: Select this when you want to compress the
dynamic range fully. (Useful at midnight).
The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights up on the
display.
NORMAL:
• If you use any of the Surround and DSP modes using the center or
rear speakers with both front speakers activated, the speakers
connected to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2 terminals are deactivated.
• When you use HEADPHONE DSP mode, you can enjoy spacious
stereo effect. (see page 25).
Select this when you want to enjoy sound with its
full dynamic range. (No effect applied.)
The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator goes off from
the display.
Notes:
• When the line direct function is turned on, the midnight mode is
canceled temporarily.
• The midnight mode is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting on
headphones, as high volume can damage both the headphones and
your hearing.
13
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
MUTING
13
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Attenuating the Input Signal
Activating the Subwoofer Sound
You can cancel the subwoofer sound even though you have
connected a subwoofer and have set “SUBWOOFER” to “YES”
(see page 17). This is useful when enjoying surround sound at night.
When the input level of the playing source is too high, the sounds
will be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.
• You can do this setting for each source.
On the front panel ONLY:
Press SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF to
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
cancel the subwoofer sound output.
Each time you press the button, the subwoofer
sound output is deactivated (“SUBWFR OFF”)
or activated (“SUBWFR ON”).
– Select “SUBWFR OFF” to deactivate the subwoofer sound
output.
– Select “SUBWFR ON” to activate it.
On the front panel ONLY:
Press and hold INPUT ATT (INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL) so that the INPUT ATT
indicator lights up on the display.
• Each time you press and hold the button, the
input attenuator mode turns on (“ATT ON”) or
off (“NORMAL”).
Note:
• This function is available only for the sources connected using the
analog terminals.
• When selecting “DVD MULTI” as the source, this effect does not
work.
You cannot select “SUBWFR OFF” even though “SUBWOOFER” is
set to “YES,” when “SMALL” is selected for the front speakers (see
page 17.)
Reinforcing the Bass
INPUT ATT
Notes:
Selecting the Line Direct Function
You can boost the bass level.
• You can do this setting for each source.
On the front panel:
BASS BOOST
Press BASS BOOST to select the bass boost
function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button
lights up.
• Each time you press the button, the bass boost
function turns on (“BOOST ON”) and off
(“BOOST OFF”).
– Select “BOOST ON” to activate the bass boost function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up.
– Select “BOOST OFF” to cancel it.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button goes off.
From the remote control:
1. Press SOUND.
The 10 keys are activated for sound
adjustments.
INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
SOUND
You can enjoy the sound closer to original source by skipping the
sound adjustments such as digital equalization and midnight mode.
Only the volume level is adjustable when the line direct function is
turned on.
• You can do this setting for each source.
Press LINE DIRECT.
The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up.
LINE DIRECT
LINE DIRECT
On the front panel
From the remote control
• Each time you press the button, the line direct function turns on
(“DIRECT ON”) and off (“DIRECT OFF”).
– Select “DIRECT ON” to activate the line direct function.
The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up.
– Select “DIRECT OFF” to cancel it.
The LINE DIRECT lamp on the front panel button goes off.
BASS
BOOST
2. Press BASS BOOST to select the bass
1
boost function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel
button lights up.
• Each time you press the button, the bass boost function turns
on (“BOOST ON”) and off (“BOOST OFF”).
– Select “BOOST ON” to activate the bass boost function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button lights up.
– Select “BOOST OFF” to cancel it.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button goes off.
Notes:
• If you turn on the line direct function while using the Surround and
DSP modes, the effect changes as follows:
Input
Mode
Analog
Digital
Surround
DSP
Not valid
Valid
Not valid
Not valid
• Turning off the line direct function activates the sound adjustments
previously selected such as the digital equalization and midnight
mode.
Note:
This function does not affect the sounds outputting from the rear
speakers.
14
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
14
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Adjusting the Equalization Patterns
Using the Sleep Timer
You can adjust equalization to your preference.
• You can do this setting for each source.
Using the Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep to music and know the
receiver will turn off by itself rather than play all night.
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
From the remote control ONLY:
On the front panel:
1. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization)
repeatedly to select the frequency.
• Each time you press the button, the frequency
with its current level changes as follows:
EQ63Hz
and its level
EQ250Hz
and its level
EQ16kHZ
DIGITAL
EQ
LEVE
ADJU
and its level
and its level
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to adjust the other frequency level.
To flat the equalization pattern,
Set all the frequency levels to “0” in step 2. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
SOUND
1. Press SOUND.
The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
2. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization)
∗DIGITALEQ
repeatedly to select the frequency you want.
10
“EQ” appears on the remote control display
RETURN
window.
• Each time you press the button, the frequency with its level
changes as follows:
EQ250Hz
and its level
EQ16kHZ
EQ1kHz
and its level
40
and its level
3. Press LEVEL + or − repeatedly to adjust
the frequency level.
The frequency level changes by 2 dB from
–8 dB to +8 dB. The DIGITAL EQ indicator
lights up on the display.
70
80
90
To cancel the Sleep Timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP 0min” appears on the display.
(The SLEEP indicator goes off.)
• Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.
Recording a Source
You can record any analog source through the receiver to —
• the cassette deck (or MD recorder) connected to the TAPE/MD
jacks,
• the VCRs connected to the VCR 1 and VCR 2 jacks, and
• the CD recorder connected to the CDR jacks
— at the same time.
For digital-to-digital recording
You can record the currently selected digital input source through
the receiver to a digital recording device connected to the DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
+
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog recordings are not possible.
• The output volume level, midnight mode (see page 13), bass boost
(see page 14), digital equalization (see the left), Surround modes
and DSP modes (see page 24) cannot affect the recording.
• The test tone signal (see page 27) does not come out through the
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
∗BAL R
To flat the equalization pattern,
Set all the frequency levels to “0” in step 3. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
Notes:
• When the line direct function is turned on, the digital equalization
cannot be adjusted.
• The digital equalization affects the front speaker sounds only.
15
15
60
To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time
Press SLEEP once.
The remaining time until the shut-off time appears in minutes.
• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
frequency level.
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
50
Notes:
EQ4kHz
and its level
30
For analog-to-analog recording
From the remote control:
and its level
20
When the shut-off time comes
The receiver turns off automatically.
EQ1kHz
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
repeatedly to adjust the frequency level.
The frequency level changes by 2 dB from
–8 dB to +8 dB. The DIGITAL EQ indicator
lights up on the display.
EQ63Hz
10
SLEEP
0 (Canceled)
EQ4kHz
and its level
Press SLEEP repeatedly.
The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display, and
the shut-off time changes as follows (in minutes):
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Basic Settings
Some of the following settings are required after connecting and positioning your speakers in your listening room, while
others will make operations easier.
Adjusting the Front Speaker Output
Balance
If the sounds you hear from the front right and left speakers are
unequal, you can adjust the speaker output balance.
• You can do this setting for each source.
When changing the source name from “TV” to
“DBS”:
• Press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV
SOUND/DBS) until “ASSGN. DBS”
appears on the display.
TV SOUND/DBS
SOURCE NAME
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
To change the source name to “TAPE” or “TV,” repeat the same
procedure above — press and hold SOURCE NAME (TAPE/MD)
to select “TAPE,” or press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV
SOUND/DBS) to select “TV.”
On the front panel:
Note:
1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly
until “BAL– (with current
setting)” appears on the display.
L
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to adjust the balance.
LEVEL
ADJUST
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
• Pressing CONTROL UP 5 decreases the
left channel output (from CENTER to
L–21).
• Pressing CONTROL DOWN ∞ decreases the
right channel output (from CENTER to R–21).
Selecting the Video Input Terminal
From the remote control:
1. Press SOUND.
SOUND
The 10 keys are activated for sound
adjustments.
2. Press L/R BAL.
“L/R” appears on the remote control display
window.
Without changing the source name, you can still use the connected
components. However, there may be some inconvenience.
– “TAPE” or “TV” will appear on the display when you select the MD
recorder or DBS tuner.
– You cannot use the digital input (see page 19) for the MD recorder.
– You cannot use the COMPU LINK remote control system (see page
41) to operate the MD recorder.
∗L/R BAL
8
This receiver is equipped with the component video input terminals
for the DVD player and DBS tuner, which give you higher picture
quality. When you use the component video input terminals for the
DVD player and/or DBS tuner, change the video input terminal
setting.
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
On the front panel ONLY:
3. Press BAL L or BAL R to adjust
the balance.
• Pressing BAL L decreases the right
channel output (from CENTER to R–21).
• Pressing BAL R decreases the left channel
output (from CENTER to L–21).
+
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
∗BAL R
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“VIDEO DVD” or “VIDEO DBS”
appears on the display.
The display changes to show the current setting.
• Select “VIDEO DVD” to select the video input terminal for
the DVD player and “VIDEO DBS” for the DBS tuner.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the appropriate video
input terminal.
Changing the Source Name
CT SETTING
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
When you have connected an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks
or the DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks on the rear panel,
change the source name which will be shown on the display when
you select the MD recorder or DBS tuner as the source.
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
On the front panel ONLY:
COMPNT: Select this when you connect the DVD player or
DBS tuner to the component video input terminals.
When changing the source name from “TAPE” to
“MD”:
• Press and hold SOURCE NAME
(TAPE/MD) until “ASSGN. MD”
appears on the display.
S/C:
COMPNT
S/C
(Component)
(S-video/Composite)
Select this when you connect the DVD player or DBS
tuner to the composite video or S-video input terminal.
TAPE / MD
SOURCE NAME
Note:
Without changing the video input terminal setting, you can see the
picture through the video input terminals, but cannot use the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system correctly (see page 47).
16
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
16
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Setting the Speakers for a Surround
Field
Setting the Subwoofer Information
Register whether you have connected a subwoofer or not.
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
On the front panel ONLY:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“SUBWOOFER” appears on the
display.
CT SETTING
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
Front, Center, and Rear Speaker Setting
The display changes to show the current setting.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select “YES” or “NO.”
To obtain the best possible surround sound of the Surround and DSP
modes, you have to register the information about the speakers
arrangement after all connections are completed.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
Register the sizes of all the connected speakers.
• When you change your speakers, you need to register the
information about the speakers again.
On the front panel ONLY:
• Each time you press the button, the display
alternates between “YES” and “NO.”
YES:
Select this when a subwoofer is connected.
NO:
Select this when no subwoofer is used.
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“FRONT SPK” (Front Speaker),
“CTR SPK” (Center Speaker) or
“REAR SPK” (Rear Speaker)
appears on the display.
CT SETTING
The display changes to show the current setting.
Note:
You cannot use SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF on the front panel (see
page 14) and adjust the subwoofer output level (see below) when
“SUBWOOFER” is set to “NO.”
Adjusting the Subwoofer Output Level
You can adjust the subwoofer output level if you have selected
“YES” for the “SUBWOOFER” (see above).
Once it has been adjusted, the receiver memorizes the adjustment.
• You can do this setting for each source.
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
• When the front speakers are all deactivated, the subwoofer level
cannot be adjusted.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the appropriate item
about the speaker selected in the
above step.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
LARGE
SMALL
NONE
LARGE: Select this when the speaker size is relatively large.
SMALL: Select this when the speaker size is relatively small.
NONE:
Select this when you have not connected a speaker.
(Not selectable for the front speakers)
On the front panel:
1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly until
“SUBWFR” appears on the display.
AL
LEVEL
ADJUST
The display changes to show the current setting.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to adjust the subwoofer output level
(from –20 dB to +10 dB).
From the remote control:
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the appropriate
items for the other speakers.
Notes:
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
SOUND
1. Press SOUND.
• Keep the following comment in mind as reference when adjusting.
– If the size of the cone speaker unit built in your speaker is greater
than 4 3/4 inches (12 cm), select “LARGE,” and if it is smaller than
4 3/4 inches (12 cm), select “SMALL.”
• If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer setting, you can only
select “LARGE” for the front speaker setting.
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speaker setting, you
cannot select “LARGE” for the center and rear speaker settings.
The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
∗SUBWFR
2. Press SUBWFR .
7/P
“S-WFR” appears on the remote control display
window.
3. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the
subwoofer output level (from –20 dB
to +10 dB).
+
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
∗BAL R
17
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
17
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Center Delay Time Setting
Register the delay time of the sound from the center speaker,
comparing to that of the sound from the front speakers.
If the distance from your listening point to the center speaker is
equal to that to the front speakers, select 0 ms. As the distance to the
center speaker becomes shorter, increase the delay time.
• 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 11 13/16
inches (30 cm) decrease (or increase) in distance.
• When shipped from the factory, the delay time is set to 0 ms.
Left front
speaker
Center
speaker
Right front
speaker
3.0 m
2.7 m
2.4 m
2.1 m
On the front panel ONLY:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“CTR DELAY” (Center Delay)
appears on the display.
CT SETTING
The display changes to show the current setting.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the delay time of the
center speaker output (from 0 ms
to 5 ms).
• Center delay time is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.
• You cannot adjust the center delay time when you have set “CTR
SPK” to “NONE.”
Rear Delay Time Setting
Register the delay time of the sound from the rear speakers,
comparing to that of the sound from the front speakers.
If the distance from your listening point to the rear speakers is equal
to that to the front speakers, select 0 ms. As the distance to the rear
speakers becomes shorter, increase the delay time.
• 1 msec increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to 11 13/16
inches (30 cm) decrease (or increase) in distance.
• Rear delay time for Dolby Digital and DTS Digital Surround is to
be set to 5 ms.
• When shipped from the factory, the delay time is set to 5 ms.
Crossover Frequency Setting
Small speakers cannot reproduce the bass sound very well. So, if
you have used a small speaker for any of the front, center, and rear
channels, this receiver automatically reallocates the bass elements,
originally assigned to the channel for which you have connected the
small speaker, to another channel (for which you have connected the
large speaker).
To use this function properly, you need to set the crossover
frequency level according to the size of the small speaker connected.
• If you have selected “LARGE” for all speakers (see page 17), this
function cannot be adjusted.
On the front panel ONLY:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“CROSS OVER” appears on the
display.
ECT SETTING
The display changes to show the current setting.
On the front panel ONLY:
ECT SETTING
The display changes to show the current
setting.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the delay time of the rear
speaker output (from 0 ms to
15 ms).
Right rear
speaker
Ex. Set the center delay time to “1 ms” and the rear
delay time to “2 ms.”
Notes:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“REAR DELAY” appears on the
display.
Left rear
speaker
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the crossover frequency
level according to the size of the
small speaker connected.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
80Hz
100Hz
120Hz
• Use the following comments as reference when adjusting.
Notes:
• Rear delay time is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.
• You cannot adjust the rear delay time when you have set “REAR
SPK” to “NONE.”
80Hz:
Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the
speaker is about 4 3/4 inches (12 cm).
100Hz:
Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the
speaker is about 3 15/16 inches (10 cm).
120Hz:
Select this when the cone speaker unit built in the
speaker is about 3 3/16 inches (8 cm).
Note:
Crossover frequency is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback,
5 CH /4 CH Stereo, 3D-PHONIC, and HEADPHONE DSP modes.
18
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
18
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Low Frequency Effect Attenuator Setting
To set the DIGITAL 2/3/4 terminals:
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back a source using
Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround, follow the procedure below.
1. Press SETTING again until
DIGITAL 2/3/4 terminals' setting
appears on the display.
On the front panel ONLY:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“LFE ATT” (Low Frequency
Effect Attenuator) appears on the
display.
T SETTING
The display changes to show the current settings.
CT SETTING
DIGITAL 2 terminal setting
The display changes to show the current setting.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the low frequency effect
attenuator level.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
DIGITAL 4 terminal setting
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the appropriate digital
terminal settings.
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
0dB
DIGITAL 3 terminal setting
10dB
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
• Each time you press the buttons, the
display changes to show the following:
0dB:
Normally select this.
10dB:
Select this when the bass sound is distorted.
When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “DVD”
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR “
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: MD** “
2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR “
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR “
(back to the beginning)
Notes:
• Low frequency effect attenuator is not valid for the DVD MULTI
playback mode.
• This function takes effect only when the Dolby Digital or DTS Digital
Surround sounds with LFE signal comes in (with “SUBWOOFER”
set to “YES”).
When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “MD”**
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD “
2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR “
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “
(back to the beginning)
Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal
Setting
When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “CDR”
When you use the digital input terminals, you have to register what
components are connected to which terminals (DIGITAL IN 1/2/3/4).
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD “
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD “
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD** “
2: CD 3: MD** 4: DVD “
(back to the beginning)
Before you start, remember...
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “TV” or “DBS”
2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR “ 2: MD** 3: DVD 4: CDR “
2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR “ 2: CD 3: DVD 4: MD** “
(back to the beginning)
On the front panel ONLY:
To set the DIGITAL 1 terminal:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
“DGTL COAX” (Digital Coaxial)
appears on the display.
CT SETTING
When the DGTL COAX (DIGITAL 1) is set to “CD”
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD** “
2: DVD 3: MD** 4: CDR “
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR “
(back to the beginning)
The display changes to show the current setting
for DIGITAL 1 terminal.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the appropriate digital
terminal setting.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
1: DVD “ 1: MD** “ 1: CDR “ 1 : TV (or DBS* ) “
1: CD “ (back to the beginning)
* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”
“DBS” appears (see page 16).
** Change the source name to “MD” for TAPE/MD jacks when you
use an MD recorder (see page 16).
* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”
“DBS” appears (see page 16).
** Change the source name to “MD” for TAPE/MD jacks when you
use an MD recorder (see page 16).
Note:
When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have been
set for use with the following components.
• DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
• DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player
• DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner
• DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder
19
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
19
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Selecting the Analog or Digital Input
Mode
When you have connected digital source components using the
digital terminals (see page 8), you need to change the input mode for
these components to the appropriate digital input mode correctly —
DGTL AUTO, DGTL DTS, or DGTL D.D.
Before you start, remember...
• The digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting should be
correctly done for the sources you want to select the digital
input mode for. Without setting this digital input terminal
correctly, you cannot change the input mode from analog input to
digital input even if you follow the procedure below.
When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or
DTS Digital Surround, “DGTL AUTO” may not work properly
and the following symptoms may occur:
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.
• Noise comes out while using the searching or skipping
chapters or tracks.
In this case press CONTROL UP 5/
DOWN ∞ to select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL
DTS” while “DGTL AUTO” still remains
on the display.
• Each time you press the button, the input
mode changes as follows.
DGTL AUTO
(Digital)
(Digital)
1. Press one of the source selecting button (DVD, TV
SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, or TAPE/MD)* for which
you want to change the input mode.
The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
TV SOUND/DBS
SOURCE NAME
PHONO
FM / AM
SOURCE NAME
Note:
* Among the source listed above, you can select the digital input
only for the sources which you have selected the digital input
terminals for. (See “Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting”
on page 19.)
INPUT
2. Press INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL ANALOG/DIGITAL
(INPUT ATT) briefly to change
the input mode.
INPUT ATT
• Each time you press the button, the input
mode changes as follows.
DGTL AUTO
ANALOG
(Digital)
DGTL AUTO: Select this for the digital input mode. The
receiver automatically detects the incoming
signal.
ANALOG:
Select this for the analog input mode.
always lights up.
ANALOG
When selecting “DGTL AUTO,” following indicators showing
detected signals light up on the display.
LINEAR PCM
DIGITAL
DGTL D.D
(Digital Dolby Digital)
DGTL DTS
On the front panel:
DVD MULTI
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
: Always lights up.
: • Lights up when Linear PCM signals come in.
• The frame flashes when detecting signals.
• LINEAR PCM without frame flashes when
PCM signals are not recognized.
: Lights up when Dolby Digital signals come in.
: Lights up when DTS Digital Surround signals
come in.
When selecting “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS,” following
indicators showing detected signals light up on the display.
: Always lights up.
When selecting “DGTL D.D”
DIGITAL : • Lights up when Dolby Digital signals come in.
• The frame flashes when Dolby Digital signals
are not recognized.
When selecting “DGTL DTS”
: • Lights up when DTS Digital Surround signals come in.
• The frame flashes when DTS Digital Surround
signals are not recognized.
Note:
When you turn off the power or select another source, “DGTL
D.D” and “DGTL DTS” settings are canceled and the digital input
mode is automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”
To change the input mode back to analog input, select
“ANALOG” in step 2.
From the remote control:
1. Press the source selecting
button (DVD, CD, TV/DBS,
CDR, or TAPE/MD)* for
which you want to change
the input mode.
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
Note:
* Among the source listed above, you can select the digital input
only for the sources which you have selected the digital input
terminals for. (See “Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminal Setting”
on page 19.)
2. Press ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT
to change the input mode.
ANALOG/DIGITAL
INPUT
• Each time you press the button, the
input mode changes as follows:
DGTL AUTO
(Digital)
ANALOG
When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or
DTS Digital Surround, “DGTL AUTO” may not happen to
work well. In this case press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ on
the front panel to select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” (while
“DGTL AUTO” remains on the display).
Note:
You can select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” from the remote control by
using the On-Screen Menus (see page 36).
20
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
20
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Showing the Text Information on the
Display
When you have connected an MD recorder or CD player equipped
with TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system (see page 42),
you can show the text information, such as disc title or track title,
on the display of this receiver. To show it on the display, follow the
procedure below.
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
On the front panel ONLY:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “FL
DISP” (Display) appears on the
display.
CT SETTING
The display changes to show the current setting.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select either the source name or
the text information to be shown
on the display.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
NORM
(Normal)
Basic Setting and Adjustment — Auto
Memory
Without any setting required, this receiver stores different sound
settings for each different playing source automatically whenever
you do the following:
• Turning on the power (see page 11)
• Changing the source to play (see page 11)
• Changing the source name (see page 16)
So, you do not have to change the sound settings next time you
select the same source. The stored settings for the selected source
are automatically recalled.
The following settings are automatically stored for each source:
• Front speaker output balance (see page 16)
• Subwoofer setting and its output level (see page 17)
• Input attenuator mode (see page 14)
• Midnight mode (see page 13)
• Bass boost (see page 14)
• Digital equalization adjustment (see page 15)
• Line direct (see page 14)
• Surround mode on/off (see page 26)
• Surround/DSP mode setting (see pages 27 – 34)
• DVD MULTI playback mode setting (see page 35)
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 20)
You can assign and store the volume level for each source. See
below.
TEXT
NORM:
Source name and Surround/DSP mode appear
during play.
TEXT:
Text information appears during play.
Notes:
Note:
• If the source is FM or AM, you can assign different settings for each
band.
• You cannot assign and store different settings for each digital input
mode.
• The Surround modes and DSP modes cannot be used with DVD
MULTI playback mode at the same time.
Though you have selected “TEXT,” the source name and Surround /
DSP mode appear if a playing disc has no text information.
To store the volume level
Before you start, remember....
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
On the front panel ONLY:
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until “ONE
TOUCH” appears on the display.
ECT SETTING
The display changes to show the current setting.
2. Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to turn on the One Touch
Operation.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
The ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator
lights up on the display.
• Each time you press the button, the one touch operation
function turns on (“ON”) and off (“OFF”).
To recall the volume level
With the ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator lit, the volume level
for the currently selected source is recalled when the source is
selected.
To cancel the One Touch Operation
Select “OFF” in step 2 above so that the ONE TOUCH
OPERATION indicator goes off. (Even though the One Touch
Operation is canceled, the recalled volume remains active.)
21
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
21
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Receiving Radio Broadcasts
You can browse through all the stations or use the preset function to go immediately to a particular station.
Tuning in Stations Manually
Using Preset Tuning
On the front panel:
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
(FM or AM).
FM/AM
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be
quickly tuned. You can preset up to 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
To store the preset stations
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights
up. The last received station of the selected band is
tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
Before you start, remember...
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
On the front panel ONLY:
ANALOG
L
TUNED STEREO
R
1. Tune in the station you want to preset (see
“Tuning in Stations Manually” on the left).
SPEAKERS
VOLUME
1
2. Press FM/AM TUNING 5/∞ until
you find the frequency you want.
FM/AM TUNING
• Pressing FM/AM TUNING 5 increases
the frequency.
• Pressing FM/AM TUNING ∞ decreases
the frequency.
ANALOG
L
TUNED STEREO
R
SPEAKERS
VOLUME
1
From the remote control:
2. Press MEMORY.
MEMORY
FM / AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
(FM or AM).
ANALOG
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button
lights up. The last received station of the
selected band is tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
2. Press TUNING UP 3 or
TUNING DOWN 2 until you
find the frequency you want.
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the
FM Reception Mode” on page 23.
L
R
TUNED STEREO
SPEAKERS
VOLUME
1
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for
about 10 seconds.
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
• Pressing TUNING UP 3 increases the
frequency.
• Pressing TUNING DOWN 2 decreases the
frequency.
3. Press FM/AM PRESET 5/∞ to
select a channel number while the
channel number position is
flashing.
4. Press MEMORY again while the
selected channel number is
flashing on the display.
FM/AM PRESET
MEMORY
The selected channel number stops flashing.
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.
Notes:
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED
indicator lights up on the display.
• When an FM stereo program is received, the STEREO indicator
also lights up.
• When you hold the button (and release it) in step 2, the frequency
keeps changing until a station is tuned in.
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED STEREO
SPEAKERS
VOLUME
1
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations
you want.
To erase a stored preset station
Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored
one.
22
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
22
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
To tune in a preset station
Selecting the FM Reception Mode
On the front panel:
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
(FM or AM).
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to
receive or noisy
FM/AM
You can change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM
broadcast.
• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station.
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights
up. The last received station of the selected band is
tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
2. Press FM/AM PRESET 5/∞ until
you find the channel you want.
Press FM MODE.
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates
between “AUTOMUTING” and “MONO.”
FM/AM PRESET
• Pressing FM/AM PRESET 5 increases the
number.
• Pressing FM/AM PRESET ∞ decreases the
number.
∗REAR L
FM MODE
0
FM MODE
On the front panel
From the remote control
From the remote control:
FM / AM
1. Press FM/AM.
ANALOG
The last received station of the selected band is
tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
2. Press the 10 keys to select a preset
channel number.
•
•
•
•
L
R
AUTO MUTING TUNED STEREO
SPEAKERS
VOLUME
1
BASS
BOOST
EFFECT
1
2
ROOM
SIZE
TEST
CTR TONE
3
MENU
LIVENESS
For channel number 5, press 5.
4
5
6
ENTER
For channel number 15, press +10 then 5. ∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
8
9
For channel number 20, press +10 then 10. 7/P
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
For channel number 30, press +10, +10,
10
0
+10
RETURN
FM MODE
100+
then 10.
Note:
When you use the 10 keys on the remote control, be sure that they
are activated for the tuner, not for the CD and others. (See page 11.)
ANALOG
L
R
TUNED
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
AUTOMUTING: When a program is broadcasted in stereo, you
will hear stereo sound; when in monaural, you will
hear monaural sounds. This mode is also useful to
suppress static noise between stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator lights up on the display.
MONO: Reception will be improved although you will lose the
stereo effect. In this mode, you will hear noise while
tuning into the stations. The AUTO MUTING indicator
goes off from the display.
Note:
When using the FM MODE on the remote control, be sure that the 10
keys are activated for the tuner, not for the CD and others. (See page
11.)
23
EN11_23.RX-8010V[J]_f
23
01.1.11, 5:52 PM
Creating a Surround Field in Your Room
The built-in Surround Processor provides Surround mode and four types of the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) mode —
DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) mode, 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode, 3D-PHONIC mode, and HEADPHONE DSP mode.
With this receiver, you can use a Surround mode and a DSP mode at the same time. Once you have adjusted Surround
and/or DSP modes, the adjustments done for each source are memorized.
Surround modes
With this receiver, you can use two types of the Surround mode.
Following modes cannot be used when only the front speakers
are connected to this receiver (without the rear speakers or
center speaker).
Dolby Surround (Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic) *
Used to watch the soundtracks of software encoded with Dolby
Digital (bearing the mark
) or with Dolby Surround
DOLBY SURROUND ).
(bearing the mark
Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel, right
front channel, center channel, and rear channel (total 4 channels)
signals into 2 channels. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this
receiver decode these 2 channel signals into original 4 channel
signals — matrix-based multichannel reproduction, and allows you
to enjoy the realistic sound field in your listening room.
On the other hand, Dolby Digital encoding method (so called a
discrete 5.1 channel digital audio format) records and compresses
the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left rear
channel, right rear channel, and LFE channel (total 6 channels, but
LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel, therefore called 5.1
channels) signals digitally. Each channel is completely independent
from other channel signals to avoid interference, therefore, you can
obtain much better sound quality with much stereo and surround
effects.
The Dolby Digital decoder built in this receiver can create much
more realistic sound field in your listening room. You may feel as if
you were in a real theater.
In addition, Dolby Digital enables stereo rear sounds, and sets the
cutoff frequency of the rear treble at 20 kHz, comparing to 7 kHz for
Dolby Pro Logic. These facts enhance the sound movement and
being-there feelings much more than Dolby Pro Logic.
• To enjoy the software encoded with Dolby Digital, you must
connect the source component using the digital terminal on the
rear of this receiver. (See page 8.)
D I G I T A L
DTS Digital Surround **
DTS Digital Surround is another discrete 5.1 channel digital audio
format available on CD, LD, and DVD software encoded with DTS
).
Digital Surround (bearing the mark
Comparing to Dolby Digital, audio compression rate is relatively
low. This fact allows DTS Digital Surround format to add breadth
and depth to the reproduced sounds. As a result, DTS Digital
Surround features natural, solid and clear sound.
• To enjoy the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround, you
must connect the source component using the digital terminal on
the rear of this receiver. (See page 8.)
* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro
Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works. ©1992–1997 Dolby
Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.
DSP modes
With this receiver, you can use four types of the DSP mode.
DAP modes
In order to reproduce a more acoustic sound field in your listening
room while playing music sources, you can use DAP modes. This
mode can be used when the front speakers are connected to this
receiver (without respect to the rear/center speaker connection).
THEATER 1:
Reproduces the sound field of a large theater
(where the seating capacity about 1,000).
THEATER 2:
Reproduces the sound field of a small theater
(where the seating capacity about 300).
HALL 1:
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a large concert
hall (where the seating capacity about 1,000).
HALL 2:
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a small concert
hall (where the seating capacity about 300).
LIVE CLUB:
Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low
ceiling.
DANCE CLUB: Gives a throbbing bass beat.
PAVILION:
Gives the spacious feeling of a pavilion with a
high ceiling.
5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode
You can create more powerful sound field for both of the digital and
analog stereo sounds source. The 4 CH Stereo mode reproduces a
sound filed through the front left and right speakers and rear left and
right speakers. The 5 CH Stereo mode adds the center channel
element to the 4 CH Stereo sound field by outputting mixed left and
right signals through the center speaker. This mode cannot be used
when only the front speakers are connected to this receiver
without the rear speakers.
Note:
“5CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to
“LARGE” or “SMALL,” and “4CH STEREO” is selected when setting
the center speaker to “NONE” (see page 17).
** Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US
Pat. No. 5,451,942 and other world-wide patents issues and
pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc. ©1996 Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
24
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
24
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
3D-PHONIC modes
The 3D-PHONIC mode gives you such a nearly surround effect as is
reproduced through the Dolby Surround decoder, which is widely
used to reproduce sounds with a feeling of movement like those
experienced in movie theaters. The 3D-PHONIC mode is the result
of research on sound localization technology carried out at JVC for
many years. This mode can be used when the front speakers are
connected to this receiver (without respect to the rear/center
speaker connection). When the 3D PHONIC mode is reproduced
with the center speaker connected, you can feel as if actors on the
screen actually speak in your room.
• You can select “3D ACTION” only when playing an analog or
linear PCM (digital) source.
• You can select “3D DIGITAL” only when playing a source
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS Digital Surround.
Reproducing the Sound Field
The sound heard in a concert hall or club consists of direct sound
and indirect sound — early reflections and reflections from behind.
Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any reflection. On
the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the distances of the
ceiling and walls. These direct sounds and indirect sounds are the
most important elements of the acoustic surround effects.
The Surround and DSP modes can create these important elements,
and give you a real “being there” feeling.
Reflections from
behind
Early reflections
3D ACTION:
Best for action and war movies — where the
action is fast and explosive.
3D DIGITAL:
Reproduces multichannel source encoded with
Dolby Digital or with DTS Digital Surround.
HEADPHONE DSP mode
The HEADPHONE DSP mode can create the stereo sound as if you
listen through the speakers while listening to a source using
headphones. So you can feel as if you were in a music room. This
mode can be used only when both of the front speakers are
deactivated (see page 13.)
Direct sounds
DVD MULTI Playback Mode
This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for
reproducing the analog discrete 5.1 channel output mode of the
DVD player or other equipment.
You can adjust the DVD MULTI playback mode while playing
back a video software such as a DVD using the analog discrete
5.1 channel output mode.
• For the DVD MULTI playback mode connection, see page 7.
• For details on the DVD MULTI playback mode, see page 35.
Notes:
• When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, you cannot
select or adjust the Surround and DSP modes.
• The PRO LOGIC indicator lights up when the Dolby Pro Logic
decorder built in this receiver is activated.
• When the line direct function is turned on, the Surround and DSP
modes are canceled temporarily (see page 14).
• No adjustment can be made for the HEADPHONE DSP mode.
DSP Modes Available to Input Mode
MODE
V: Possible / 2: Impossible
SURROUND
D
S
P
DAP MODE
3D
ACTION
(DIGITAL)
5 CH/4 CH
Stereo
INPUT
SIGNAL
SURROUND SURR.
with
OFF
DAP
DSP OFF
HEADPHOHE
HEADPHONE HEADPHONE
DSP
ANALOG
(2 CH)
V
(DOLBY PRO LOGIC)
V
V
(3D ACTION)
V
V
V
V
V
DVD MULTI
(5.1 CH)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
V
LINEAR PCM
V
(DOLBY PRO LOGIC)
V
V
(3D ACTION)
V
V
V
V
V
DOLBY DIGITAL
V
(DOLBY DIGITAL)
V
V
V
V
V
V
DTS
V *2
(DTS SURROUND)
V
V
V
V
V
V
*1
*1
*2
V
(3D DIGITAL)
V
(3D DIGITAL)
When 2 channel signal comes in, DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected. When other signals come in, DOLBY DIGITAL is selected.
When 2 channel signal comes in, DOLBY PRO LOGIC is selected. When other signals come in, DTS SURROUND is selected.
25
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
25
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
Available DSP Modes According to the Speaker Arrangement
Available DSP modes will vary depending on how many speakers are used with this receiver.
Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly (see page 17).
Speaker arrangements
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
Center speaker
Rear
speaker
Rear
speaker
Available DSP modes
Each time you press DSP MODE, the DSP modes change as follows:
THEATER 1 \ THEATER 2
\ HALL 1
\ HALL 2 \
LIVE CLUB \ DANCE CLUB \ PAVILION \
5CH STEREO (when using 5 speakers) or 4CH STEREO (when using 4 speakers)*
3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL
\ SURR. OFF (DSP OFF)
(Back to the beginning)
\
\
To activate the Surround mode, press SURROUND ON/OFF button so that the
SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.
Notes:
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
Rear
speaker
Front
speaker
• If the settings for the center and the rear speakers are changed to “NONE” (see page 17),
the Surround mode will be canceled.
• When both of the Surround mode and DSP mode are deactivated, “SURR. OFF” appears
on the display.
* “5CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “LARGE” or “SMALL,” and
“4CH STEREO” is selected when setting the center speaker to “NONE” (see page 17).
Rear
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
Center speaker
THEATER 1 \ THEATER 2
LIVE CLUB \ DANCE CLUB
3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL
(Back to the beginning)
\ HALL 1
\ HALL 2 \
\ PAVILION \
\ SURR. OFF (DSP OFF)
\
To activate the Surround mode, press SURROUND ON/OFF button so that the
SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights up.
Notes:
• If the setting for the center speaker is changed to “NONE” (see page 17), the Surround
mode will be canceled.
• When both of the Surround mode and DSP mode are deactivated, “SURR. OFF” appears
on the display.
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
THEATER 1 \ THEATER 2
LIVE CLUB \ DANCE CLUB
3D ACTION or 3D DIGITAL
(Back to the beginning)
\ HALL 1
\ HALL 2 \
\ PAVILION \
\ SURR. OFF (DSP OFF)
\
Note:
Surround mode cannot be used when only the front speakers are connected.
HEADPHONE j
HEADPHONE DSP
TV
Note:
To use the HEADPHONE or HEADPHONE DSP mode, deactivate both of the front speakers
(see page 13).
26
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
26
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
5. Select the speaker you want to adjust.
Adjusting the Surround Modes
You can also use a Surround mode with a DAP mode (see page 30).
• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.
“CTR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L.
“REARL” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R.
“REARR” appears on the remote control display window.
Before you start, remember...
• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly
(see page 17).
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again.
• You cannot adjust the rear speaker output levels when you have set
“REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17.
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and center tone
when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17.
• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output
level, see pages 16 and 17.
6. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the
speaker output levels (–10 dB to
+10 dB).
From the remote control:
7. Press SOUND.
1. Select and play a sound source.
• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with
DOLBY SURROUND mark.
Dolby Surround and labeled with
• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with
Dolby Digital and labeled with
mark.
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded
mark.
with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with
D I G I T A L
2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to
activate an appropriate Surround
mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY
DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.
SURROUND
ON/OFF
The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights
up.
• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on
and off alternately.
• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator
lights up on the display.
3. Press SOUND.
SOUND
The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
4. Press TEST to check the speaker
output balance.
TEST
4
MENU
“TEST TONE L” starts flashing on the
display, and a test tone comes out of the
speakers in the following order:
TEST TONE L
TEST TONE C
(Left front speaker)
(Center speaker)
TEST TONE R
∗CENTER
∗REAR L
∗REAR R
FM MODE
100+
0
9
+10
+
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
∗BAL R
SOUND
• To adjust other speaker output levels, repeat
steps 5 and 6.
TEST
8. Press TEST again to stop the test
tone.
4
MENU
9. Press CTR TONE to select the
center tone level you want.
CTR TONE
5
ENTER
The center tone adjustment affects the midfrequency range, which the human voice is
mostly made up of.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show
the following:
CTR TONE 1
CTR TONE 3
CTR TONE 2
(Softer)
CTR TONE 5
(Sharper)
(Soft)
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR
TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR
TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
On the front panel:
You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the
Surround modes. However, no test tone is available when using the
buttons on the front panel. So, make adjustments while listening to
the sound of the source played back.
(Right front speaker)
1. Select and play a sound source.
TEST TONE LS
TEST TONE RS
(Left rear speaker)
(Right rear speaker)
Notes:
• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with
DOLBY SURROUND mark.
Dolby Surround and labeled with
• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with
mark.
Dolby Digital and labeled with
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded
mark.
with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with
D I G I T A L
• You can adjust the speaker output levels without outputting the
test tone.
• No test tone comes out of the center speaker when “CTR SPK”
is set to “NONE” (see page 17).
• No test tone comes out of the rear speakers when “REAR SPK”
is set to “NONE” (see page 17).
• If the TV is turned on and the proper video input is selected on
the TV, the test tone screen will appear on the TV.
27
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
27
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to
activate an appropriate Surround
mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY
DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.
SURROUND ON/OFF
The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights
up.
• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on
and off alternately.
• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator
lights up on the display.
3. Adjust the speaker output levels.
1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly
until one of the following indications
appears on the display.
“CENTER”:
To adjust the center speaker level.
“REAR L”:
To adjust the left rear speaker level.
“REAR R”:
To adjust the right rear speaker level.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
adjust the selected speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other
speaker output levels.
4. Adjust the center tone.
CTR TONE 2
(Softer)
LEVEL
ADJUST
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until
the DAP mode you want to adjust
— THEATER 1, THEATER 2,
HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB,
DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION —
appears on the display.
DSP MODE
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and
the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.
• When you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE,” the 3DPHONIC indicator also lights up.
2. Adjust the speaker output levels.
1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly
until one of the following indications
appears on the display.
“CENTER”:
To adjust the center speaker level.
“REAR L”:
To adjust the left rear speaker level.
“REAR R”:
To adjust the right rear speaker level.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
adjust the selected speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other
speaker output levels.
TAL
Q
LEVEL
ADJUST
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
EFFECT SETT
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR
TONE” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
select the center tone level you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
CTR TONE 1
TAL
Q
On the front panel:
(Soft)
CTR TONE 5
(Sharper)
3. Adjust the center tone.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
CTR TONE 3
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharp)
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR
TONE” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
select the center tone level you want.
The center tone adjustment affects the
mid-frequency range, which the human
voice is mostly made up of.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
CTR TONE 1
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or
“CTR TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or
“CTR TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
Adjusting the DAP Modes
(Softer)
CTR TONE 5
(Sharper)
CTR TONE 2
(Soft)
EFFECT SETT
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
CTR TONE 3
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or
“CTR TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or
“CTR TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
You can also use a DAP mode with a Surround mode (see page 30).
Before you start, remember...
• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly
(see page 17).
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
• You cannot adjust the rear speaker output level when you have set
“REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17.
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level when you have
set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17.
• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output
level, see pages 16 and 17.
Continued to the next page.
28
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
28
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
4. Adjust the overall levels of the effect.
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until
“EFFECT” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the effect level you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
EFFECT SETT
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
EFFECT 3
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until
“ROOM SIZE” appears on the
display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
select the room size you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
ROOMSIZE 5
EFFECT SETTIN
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
ROOMSIZE 3
4. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the
speaker output levels (–10 dB to
+10 dB).
+
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
5. Press SOUND.
∗BAL R
SOUND
• To adjust other speaker output levels, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
6. Press CTR TONE to select the
center tone level you want.
CTR TONE
5
ENTER
CTR TONE 3
CTR TONE 2
CTR TONE 1
(Softer)
(Soft)
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharper)
6. Adjust the liveness.
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR
TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR
TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
EFFECT SETT
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until
“LIVENESS” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
select the liveness level you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
7. Press EFFECT to adjust the
overall level of the effect.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
EFFECT 1
LIVENESS 3
EFFECT
2
MENU
• Each time you press the button, the effect
level changes as follows:
EFFECT 2
EFFECT 5
LIVENESS 5
100+
CTR TONE 5
ROOMSIZE 4
LIVENESS 2
+10
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
As the number increases, the interval between reflections
increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger
room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)
LIVENESS 1
∗REAR R
0
FM MODE
5. Adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness).
ROOMSIZE 2
∗REAR L
9
As the number increases, the selected DAP effect becomes
stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)
ROOMSIZE 1
• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.
“CTR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L.
“REARL” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R.
“REARR” appears on the remote control display window.
∗CENTER
EFFECT 4
EFFECT 5
3. Select the speaker you want to adjust.
EFFECT 3
EFFECT 4
As the number increases, the selected DAP effect becomes
stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)
LIVENESS 4
As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections
over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to
“Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)
From the remote control:
8. Press ROOM SIZE to adjust the
room size (sense of spaciousness).
ROOM
SIZE
3
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
ROOMSIZE 1
ROOMSIZE 2
ROOMSIZE 3
DSP
1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until the
MODE
DAP mode you want to adjust —
THEATER 1, THEATER 2, HALL 1,
HALL 2, LIVE CLUB, DANCE CLUB, or
PAVILION — appears on the display.
ROOMSIZE 5
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and
the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.
• When you have set “REAR SPK” to “NONE,” the 3DPHONIC indicator also lights up.
2. Press SOUND.
SOUND
The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
29
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
29
ROOMSIZE 4
As the number increases, the interval between reflections
increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room.
(Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
9. Press LIVENESS to adjust the liveness.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
LIVENESS 1
LIVENESS 2
LIVENESS 5
LIVENESS
6
LIVENESS 3
LIVENESS 4
5. Press TEST to check the speaker
output balance.
4
MENU
“TEST TONE L” starts flashing on the
display, and a test tone comes out of the
speakers in the following order:
TEST TONE L
As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections
over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to
“Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)
TEST
TEST TONE R
TEST TONE C
(Left front speaker)
(Right front speaker)
(Center speaker)
TEST TONE LS
TEST TONE RS
(Left rear speaker)
(Right rear speaker)
Notes:
Adjusting the Surround Modes with the
DAP Modes
Before you start, remember...
• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly
(see page 17).
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 4 again.
• You cannot adjust the rear speaker output levels when you have set
“REAR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17.
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and center tone
when you have set “CTR SPK” to “NONE.” See page 17.
• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output
level, see pages 16 and 17.
From the remote control:
D I G I T A L
SURROUND
ON/OFF
DSP
MODE
∗REAR R
0
+10
100+
FM MODE
7. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the
speaker output levels (–10 dB to
+10 dB).
+
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
8. Press SOUND.
∗BAL R
SOUND
9. Press TEST again to stop the test
tone.
4
MENU
CTR TONE
5
ENTER
The center tone adjustment affects the midfrequency range, which the human voice is
mostly made up of.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show
the following:
CTR TONE 2
(Softer)
SOUND
TEST
10.Press CTR TONE to select the
center tone level you want.
CTR TONE 1
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and
the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.
The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
∗REAR L
• To adjust other speaker output levels repeat steps
6 and 7.
The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights
up.
• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on
and off alternately.
• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator
lights up on the display.
4. Press SOUND.
• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.
“CTR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L.
“REARL” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R.
“REARR” appears on the remote control display window.
9
• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with
DOLBY SURROUND mark.
Dolby Surround and labeled with
• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with
Dolby Digital and labeled with
mark.
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded
with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with
mark.
3. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until
the DAP mode you want to adjust
— THEATER 1, THEATER 2,
HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB,
DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION —
appears on the display.
6. Select the speaker you want to adjust.
∗CENTER
1. Select and play a sound source.
2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to
activate an appropriate Surround
mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY
DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.
• You can adjust the speaker output levels without outputting the
test tone.
• No test tone comes out of the center speaker when “CTR SPK”
is set to “NONE” (see page 17).
• No test tone comes out of the rear speakers when “REAR SPK”
is set to “NONE” (see page 17).
• If the TV is turned on and the proper video input is selected on
the TV, the test tone screen will appear on the TV.
CTR TONE 5
(Sharper)
(Soft)
CTR TONE 3
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR
TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR
TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
Continued to the next page.
30
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
30
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
11.Press EFFECT to adjust the
overall level of the effect.
EFFECT
2
MENU
• Each time you press the button, the effect
level changes as follows:
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
EFFECT 5
EFFECT 3
EFFECT 4
As the number increases, DAP effect becomes stronger.
(Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)
12.Press ROOM SIZE to adjust the
room size (sense of spaciousness).
ROOM
SIZE
3
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
ROOMSIZE 1
ROOMSIZE 2
ROOMSIZE 5
ROOMSIZE 3
ROOMSIZE 4
As the number increases, the interval between reflections
increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger room.
(Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)
13.Press LIVENESS to adjust the
liveness.
LIVENESS
6
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
LIVENESS 1
LIVENESS 2
LIVENESS 5
LIVENESS 3
As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections over
time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.”
(Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)
On the front panel:
You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the sound
with a Surround mode and a DAP mode. However, no test tone is
available when using the buttons on the front panel. So, make
adjustments while listening to the sound of the source played back.
1. Select and play a sound source.
• To enjoy Dolby Pro Logic, play back a software encoded with
DOLBY SURROUND mark.
Dolby Surround and labeled with
• To enjoy Dolby Digital, play back a software encoded with
Dolby Digital and labeled with
mark.
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround, play back a software encoded
with DTS Digital Surround and labeled with
mark.
D I G I T A L
SURROUND ON/OFF
The SURROUND ON/OFF lamp on the front panel button lights
up.
• Each time you press the button, the Surround mode turns on
and off alternately.
• When “PRO LOGIC” is selected, the PRO LOGIC indicator
lights up on the display.
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and
the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.
4. Adjust the speaker output levels.
1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly
until one of the following indications
appears on the display.
“CENTER”:
To adjust the center speaker level.
“REAR L”:
To adjust the left rear speaker level.
“REAR R”:
To adjust the right rear speaker level.
31
AL
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
adjust the selected speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other
speaker output levels.
EFFECT SETTIN
(Softer)
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
CTR TONE 3
CTR TONE 2
CTR TONE 1
LEVEL
ADJUST
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR
TONE” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the center tone level you
want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
(Soft)
CTR TONE 5
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharper)
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or
“CTR TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or
“CTR TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
6. Adjust the overall levels of the effect.
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until
“EFFECT” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the effect level you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
EFFECT 5
EFFECT SETT
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
EFFECT 3
EFFECT 4
As the number increases, DAP effect becomes stronger.
(Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)
31
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
DSP MODE
5. Adjust the center tone.
LIVENESS 4
2. Press SURROUND ON/OFF to
activate an appropriate Surround
mode — PRO LOGIC, DOLBY
DIGITAL or DTS SURROUND.
3. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until
the DAP mode you want to adjust
— THEATER 1, THEATER 2,
HALL 1, HALL 2, LIVE CLUB,
DANCE CLUB, or PAVILION —
appears on the display.
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
7. Adjust the room size (sense of spaciousness).
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until
“ROOM SIZE” appears on the
display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
select the room size you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
ROOMSIZE 1
ROOMSIZE 2
ROOMSIZE 5
EFFECT SETTIN
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
ROOMSIZE 3
ROOMSIZE 4
As the number increases, the interval between reflections
increases so that you will feel as if you were in a larger
room. (Normally set it to “ROOMSIZE 3.”)
8. Adjust the liveness.
EFFECT SETT
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until
“LIVENESS” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
select the liveness level you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
LIVENESS 1
LIVENESS 2
LIVENESS 5
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
LIVENESS 3
LIVENESS 4
As the number increases, the attenuation level of reflections
over time decreases so that acoustics change from “Dead” to
“Live.” (Normally set it to “LIVENESS 3.”)
Adjusting the 5 CH/4 CH Stereo Mode
Before you start, remember...
• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly
(see page 17).
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level and select the
center tone level for 4 CH Stereo mode.
• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output
level, see pages 16 and 17.
On the front panel:
1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until
“5CH STEREO” or “4CH
STEREO” appears on the display.
DSP MODE
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel
button lights up, and the DSP indicator also lights up on the
display.
• “4CH STEREO” appears on the display when you have set
“CTR SPK” to “NONE” (see page 17).
2. Adjust the speaker output levels.
1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly
until one of the following indications
appears on the display.
“CENTER” — for 5 CH Stereo mode only:
To adjust the center speaker level.
“REAR L”:
To adjust the left rear speaker level.
“REAR R”:
To adjust the right rear speaker level.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
adjust the selected speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other
speaker output levels.
TAL
Q
LEVEL
ADJUST
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
3. Adjust the center tone — for 5 CH Stereo mode
only.
EFFECT SETT
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR
TONE” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
select the center tone level you want.
The center tone adjustment affects the
mid-frequency range, which the
human voice is mostly made up of.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
CTR TONE 1
CTR TONE 3
CTR TONE 2
(Softer)
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
(Soft)
CTR TONE 5
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharper)
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or
“CTR TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or
“CTR TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
From the remote control:
1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until
“5CH STEREO” or “4CH
STEREO” appears on the display.
DSP
MODE
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and
the DSP indicator also lights up on the display.
• “4CH STEREO” appears on the display when you have set
“CTR SPK” to “NONE” (see page 17).
SOUND
2. Press SOUND.
The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
3. Select the speaker you want to adjust.
• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER— for 5 CH
Stereo mode only.
“CTR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L.
“REARL” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R.
“REARR” appears on the remote control display window.
∗CENTER
9
∗REAR L
∗REAR R
FM MODE
100+
0
+10
Continued to the next page.
32
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
32
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
+
4. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the
speaker output levels (–10 dB to
+10 dB).
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
5. Press SOUND.
∗BAL R
SOUND
• To adjust other speaker output levels, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
6. Press CTR TONE to select the
center tone level you want — for
5 CH Stereo mode only.
CTR TONE
5
CTR TONE 2
(Softer)
(Soft)
CTR TONE 5
CTR TONE 3
On the front panel:
1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until
“3D ACTION” or “3D DIGITAL”
appears on the display.
DSP MODE
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel
button lights up, and the 3D-PHONIC and DSP indicators also
light up on the display.
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharper)
Before you start, remember...
• Make sure that you have set the speaker information correctly
(see page 17).
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
• You cannot adjust the center speaker output level when you have
set “CTR SPK” to “NONE” See page 17.
• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output
level, see pages 16 and 17.
ENTER
The center tone adjustment affects the midfrequency range, which the human voice is
mostly made up of.
• Each time you press the button, the display changes to show
the following:
CTR TONE 1
Adjusting the 3D-PHONIC Modes
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR
TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 3” or “CTR
TONE 4.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
2. Adjust the center speaker output level.
1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly
until “CENTER” appears on the
display.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
adjust the center speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
L
LEVEL
ADJUST
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
3. Adjust the center tone.
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until “CTR
TONE” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the center tone level you
want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
CTR TONE 1
(Softer)
CTR TONE 5
(Sharper)
CTR TONE 2
(Soft)
EFFECT SETT
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
CTR TONE 3
(Flat)
CTR TONE 4
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or
“CTR TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or
“CTR TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
33
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
33
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
4. Adjust the overall levels of the effect.
1) Press EFFECT repeatedly until
“EFFECT” appears on the display.
The display shows the current setting.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞
to select the effect level you want.
• Each time you press the button, the
display changes to show the following:
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
EFFECT 5
EFFECT SETT
6. Press CTR TONE to select the
center tone level you want.
CTR TONE
5
ENTER
• Each time you press the button, the display
changes to show the following:
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
(Softer)
(Soft)
(Flat)
CTR TONE 5
CTR TONE 4
(Sharper)
EFFECT 3
EFFECT 4
As the number increases, the selected 3D effect mode
becomes stronger. (Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)
From the remote control:
1. Press DSP MODE repeatedly until
“3D ACTION” or “3D DIGITAL”
appears on the display.
DSP
MODE
CTR TONE 3
CTR TONE 2
CTR TONE 1
(Sharp)
To make the dialogue softer, select “CTR TONE 1” or “CTR
TONE 2.”
To make the dialogue clearer, select “CTR TONE 4” or “CTR
TONE 5.”
When “CTR TONE 3” is selected, no adjustment is applied.
7. Press EFFECT to adjust the
overall level of the effect.
EFFECT
2
MENU
• Each time you press the button, the effect
level changes as follows:
The DSP MODE lamp on the front panel button lights up, and
the 3D-PHONIC and DSP indicators also light up on the display.
SOUND
2. Press SOUND.
The 10 keys are activated for sound
adjustments.
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
EFFECT 5
EFFECT 3
EFFECT 4
As the number increases, 3D effect mode becomes stronger.
(Normally set it to “EFFECT 3.”)
∗CENTER
3. Press CENTER to select the center
speaker.
9
• “CTR” appears on the remote control display
window.
4. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the
center speaker output levels (from
–10 dB to +10 dB).
+
∗BAL L
∗
CH/ LEVEL
−
∗BAL R
SOUND
5. Press SOUND.
34
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
34
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode
This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing the analog discrete output mode of the DVD
player. Before playing back a DVD, refer also to the manual supplied with the DVD player.
Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode
You can adjust the DVD MULTI playback mode while playing back
a DVD using the analog discrete output mode on the DVD player.
Once you have made adjustments, the receiver memorizes the
adjustments until you change them. You also need to set the DVD
player to the analog discrete output mode.
Before you start, remember...
• There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 3 again.
• To adjust the front speaker output balance and subwoofer output
level, see pages 16 and 17.
From the remote control:
1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD
MULTI” appears on the display.
DVD MUILTI
The DVD MULTI lamp on the front panel button
lights up.
Note:
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, the Surround
and DSP modes are canceled, and the SURROUND ON/OFF and
DSP MODE buttons do not work.
2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the
DVD player, and start playing a DVD.
• Refer to the manual supplied with the DVD player.
On the front panel:
1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD
MULTI” appears on the display.
DVD MULTI
The DVD MULTI lamp on the front panel button
lights up.
If you need to make any adjustment, go to the following
steps.
3. Press SOUND.
SOUND
The 10 keys are activated for adjusting the
sound.
Note:
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, the Surround
and DSP modes are canceled, and the SURROUND ON/OFF and
DSP MODE buttons do not work.
2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the
DVD player, and start playing a DVD.
• Refer to the manual supplied with the DVD player.
If you need to make any adjustment, go to the following
steps.
4. Select the speaker you want to adjust.
• To select the center speaker level, press CENTER.
“CTR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left rear speaker level, press REAR L.
“REARL” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the right rear speaker level, press REAR R.
“REARR” appears on the remote control display window.
∗CENTER
9
∗REAR L
∗REAR R
0
+10
FM MODE
100+
3. Adjust the speaker output levels.
1) Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly
until one of the following indications
appears on the display.
“CENTER”:
To adjust the center speaker level.
“REAR L”:
To adjust the left rear speaker level.
“REAR R”:
To adjust the right rear speaker level.
2) Press CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ to
adjust the selected speaker output level
(from –10 dB to +10 dB).
3) Repeat 1) and 2) to adjust the other
speaker output levels.
AL
LEVEL
ADJUST
5. Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the
speaker output levels (from
–10 dB to +10 dB).
• You cannot adjust the center tone level.
• You cannot use the midnight mode for DVD MULTI playback mode
(see page 13).
• When using a pair of headphones, the sounds of front left and right
are output from the headphones.
35
35
∗
−
• To adjust other speaker output levels, then repeat
steps 4 and 5.
CONTROL
DOWN
UP
01.1.11, 9:09 PM
∗BAL L
CH/ LEVEL
6. Press SOUND.
Notes:
EN24_35.RX-8010V[J]_f
+
∗BAL R
SOUND
Using the On-Screen Menus
You can use the Menus on the TV screen to control the receiver.
To use this function, you need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 7), and set the
TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is connected.
• When the TV’s input mode is incorrect; for example, a different video input or TV tuner mode is selected, you
cannot show the Menus on the TV screen.
On-Screen Operation buttons (on the remote control)
Activating the Surround Modes
(Also see page 27)
1. Press MENU.
CATV/DBS
POWER
VCR 1
TV
AUDIO
POWER
POWER
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
SURROUND
DSP
ON/OFF
MODE
INPUT
EFFECT
1
2
TEST
CTR TONE
4
MUTING
3
∗
LIVENESS
5
SUBWFR
7/P
∗
6
ENTER
L/R BAL
8
∗
CENTER
9
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
10
0
+10
RETURN
FM MODE
100+
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
TV/VIDEO
ROOM
SIZE
MENU
MIDNIGHT
MODE
+
∗BAL L
∗
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
∗BAL R
MENU
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
−
PLAY
MENU
EXIT
+
VOLUME
PLAY
PAUSE
−
/REW
EXIT
PAUSE
FF/
SET
FF/
SET
REC
PAUSE
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SURROUND.”
3. Press 2 / 3 to select the
Surround mode you
want to use.
ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
BASS
LINE DIF.ECT BOOST
SOUND
When you press MENU, “MENU”
appears on the display window
for about 10 seconds.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
DOWN – TUNING – UP
DOWN – TUNING – UP
STOP CONTROL
RM-SRX8010J
STOP
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
4. When you finish, press
EXIT.
The menu disappears from the TV.
Activating the DSP Modes (Also see page 28)
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “DSP MODE.”
Showing the MENU on the TV Screen
Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
3. Press 2 / 3 to select the
DSP mode you want to
use.
4. When you finish, press
EXIT.
The menu disappears from the TV.
Note
Use 5 / ∞ to move
up and down, and 2 / 3
to select, adjust or set
the item.
If “DVD MULTI” is selected as a playing source, the “SURROUND
MODE” and “DSP MODE” do not appear on the display.
Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode
(Also see page 20)
This selection is only possible when the digital input (DIGITAL IN)
terminal setting has been correctly done for the digital source
currently selected (see page 19).
Notes:
• “INPUT” appears only when the digital input (DIGITAL IN)
terminal setting has been correctly done for the digital source
currently selected. (See page 19.)
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for
about 1 minute.
• The on-screen display is shown in black and white.
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “INPUT.”
3. Press 2 / 3 to select
the analog or digital
input mode you want.
4. When you finish, press
EXIT.
The menu disappears from the TV.
36
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
36
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
For Surround mode, Surround mode with DAP
mode:
“TEST TONE”:
Output a test tone.
“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance
of the front speakers.
“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output
level. *
“REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output
level. **
“REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker
output level. **
“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output
level. ***
For DAP mode:
“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance
of the front speakers.
“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output
level. *
“REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output
level. **
“REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker
output level. **
“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output
level. ***
Adjusting the Equalization Pattern
(Also see page 15)
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “DIGITAL EQ,”
then press 2 / 3.
The DIGITAL EQ menu
appears.
4. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to the frequency you
want to adjust.
5. Press 2 / 3 to adjust
the frequency level you
want.
The frequency level changes
by 2 dB from –8 dB to +8 dB.
For 5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode:
“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance
of the front speakers.
“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output
level. ****
“REAR L LEVEL”: Adjust the left rear speaker output
level. **
“REAR R LEVEL”: Adjust the right rear speaker
output level. **
“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output
level. ***
6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Adjusting the Surround and DSP Modes
(Also see pages 27 – 34)
You can use a Surround mode with a DAP mode, but not with the
5 CH/4 CH Stereo mode and 3D PHONIC mode.
1. Press MENU.
For 3D-PHONIC mode:
“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance
of the front speakers.
“CENTER LEVEL”: Adjust the center speaker output
level. *
“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output
level.***
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Select Surround mode and/or DSP mode you like
to adjust (see page 36).
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then
press 2 / 3.
For Surround off and DSP OFF:
“L/R BALANCE”: Adjust the right and left balance
of the front speakers.
“SUBWFR LEVEL”: Adjust the subwoofer output
level.***
The SOUND CONTROL
menu appears.
4. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “LEVEL
ADJUST,” then press
2 / 3.
Notes:
You cannot select “CENTER LEVEL” when “CTR SPK” is set
to “NONE” (see page 17).
** You cannot select “REAR L LEVEL” and “REAR R LEVEL”
when “REAR SPK” is set to “NONE” (see page 17).
*** You cannot select “SUBWFR LEVEL” when “SUBWOOFER”
is set to “NO” (see page 17).
**** You cannot select “CENTER LEVEL” when 4 CH Stereo
mode is selected.
*
The LEVEL ADJUST menu
appears.
5. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to the item you want to
set or adjust, then press 2 / 3.
On these adjustment menus, you can do the followings:
6. Press EXIT once.
37
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
37
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
7. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “EFFECT ADJUST,”
then press 2 / 3.
5. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to the item you want to
set or adjust, then press 2 / 3.
On this adjustment menu, you can do the following:
“L/R BALANCE”:
Adjust the right and left balance
of the front speakers.
“CENTER LEVEL”:
Adjust the center speaker output
level.
“REAR L LEVEL”:
Adjust the left rear speaker output
level.
“REAR R LEVEL”:
Adjust the right rear speaker
output level.
“SUBWFR LEVEL”:
Adjust the subwoofer output level.
The EFFECT ADJUST menu
appears.
8. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to the item you want to
set or adjust, then press
2 / 3.
On these adjustment menus,
you can do the followings.
6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
For Surround mode:
“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. *
For DAP mode, Surround mode with DAP:
“EFFECT LEVEL”: Adjust the surround effect level.
“ROOM SIZE”:
Adjust the room size effect.
“LIVENESS”:
Adjust the liveness level.
“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. *
For 3D-PHONIC mode:
“EFFECT LEVEL”: Adjust the surround effect level.
“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level. *
Note:
*
You cannot select “EFFECT ADJUST” in step 7, when both of
the Surround and DSP modes are deactivated.
You cannot select “CENTER TONE” when “CTR SPK” is set to
“NONE” (see page 17).
9. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Adjusting the DVD MULTI Playback Mode
(Also see page 35)
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “MIDNIGHT
MODE.”
4. Press 2 / 3 to select
the mode you want to
use.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Attenuating the Input Signal
(Also see page 14)
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
1. Select DVD MULTI as the playing source.
Press DVD MULTI.
2. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the MENU.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “INPUT ATT.”
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
4. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “LEVEL ADJUST,”
then press 2 / 3.
1. Press MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
For 5 CH Stereo mode:
“CENTER TONE”: Select the center tone level.
•
Listening at Night — Midnight Mode
(Also see page 13)
4. Press 2 / 3 to select
the Input Attenuator
mode “ATT ON” or
“NORMAL.”
The LEVEL ADJUST menu
appears.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
38
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
38
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
Selecting the Line Direct Function
(Also see page 14)
Operating the Tuner (Also see pages 22 and 23)
1. Select FM or AM as the playing source.
1. Press MENU.
Press FM/AM.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “LINE DIRECT.”
4. Press 2 / 3 to turn the
line direct function
“ON” or “OFF.”
Selecting the Bass Boost Function
(Also see page 14)
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “TUNER
CONTROL,” then
press 2 / 3.
4. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to the item you want to
set or adjust, then press
2 / 3.
On the TUNER CONTROL
menu, you can do the
following:
“BAND”:
Select the band.
“PRESET CH”:
Select a preset channel station.
“FREQUENCY”:
Tune in a station manually.
“FM MODE”:
Select the FM reception mode.*
“PRESET MEMORY”: See “Storing the Preset Stations.”
* Not displayed when an AM station is selected.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “BASS BOOST.”
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Storing the Preset Stations (Also see page 22)
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
5. When you finish, press
EXIT repeatedly until
the menu disappears from the TV.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “TUNER
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
Activating the Subwoofer Sound
(Also see page 14)
The TUNER CONTROL menu appears.
3. Tune into a station on the TUNER CONTROL
menu, referring to “Operating the Tuner”.
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then press 2 / 3.
4. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “PRESET
MEMORY,” then press
2 / 3.
moves to “PRESET CH”
and the channel number starts
flashing.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SUBWOOFER.”
5. When you finish, press
EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from
the TV.
39
5. Press 2 / 3 to select a preset station number you
want.
6. Press SET to store the setting.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
7. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
39
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
Note:
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
4. Press 2 / 3 to turn the
subwoofer output
“ON” or “OFF.”
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
The TUNER CONTROL
menu appears.
5. When you finish, press
EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from
the TV.
4. Press 2 / 3 to turn the
bass boost function
“ON” or “OFF.”
2. Press MENU.
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
SETTING 2 menu
“DIGITAL 1/2/3/4”: Set the digital input terminal 1/2/3/4
(see page 19).
“VIDEO DVD”:
Set the video input terminal for the
DVD player (see page 16).
“VIDEO DBS”:
Set the video input terminal for the
DBS tuner (see page 16).
“LFE ATT”:
Set the low frequency effect attenuator
level (see page 19).
“FL DISPLAY”:
Shows the disc text information on the
display (see page 21).
Setting the Basic Setting Items
(Also see pages 16 – 21)
1. Press MENU.
The MENU appears on the TV.
• Pressing one of the 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 buttons also displays the
MENU.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SETTING,”
then press 2 / 3.
The SETTING 1 appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to the item you
want to set or adjust,
then press 2 / 3.
• To go to the SETTING 2
to “NEXT
menu, move
PAGE,” then press 2 / 3.
• To go back to the SETTING
1 menu, move
to
“PREVIOUS PAGE,” then
press 2 / 3.
Notes:
* You cannot select “CNTR DELAY” when “CTR SPK” is set to
“NONE” (see page 17).
** You cannot select “REAR DELAY” when “REAR SPK” is set to
“NONE” (see page 17).
4. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
On the SETTING 1 and 2
menus, you can do the
following:
SETTING 1 menu
“SUBWOOFER”:
Set the subwoofer information (see
page 17).
“FRONT SPK”:
Set the front speaker information (see
page 17).
“CENTER SPK”: Set the center speaker information (see
page 17).
“REAR SPK”:
Set the rear speaker information (see
page 17).
“CNTR DELAY”: Adjust the delay time of the center
speaker output (see page 18). *
“REAR DELAY”: Adjust the delay time of the rear
speaker output (see page 18). **
“CROSSOVER”:
Set the crossover frequency
(see page 18).
“ONE TOUCH OPR”: Set the one touch operation
(see page 21).
40
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
40
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC audio components through the remote sensor on
the receiver.
To use this remote control system, you need to connect JVC audio
components through the COMPU LINK (SYNCHRO) jacks (see
below) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin
plugs (see pages 5 and 6).
• Make sure that the AC power cords of these components are
unplugged before connection. Plug the AC power cords only after
all connections are complete.
Automatic Source Selection
When you press the play (3
3) button on a connected component or
on its own remote control, the receiver automatically turns on and
changes the source to the component. On the other hand, if you
select a new source on the receiver or on the remote control, the
selected component begins playing immediately.
In both cases, the previously selected source continues playing
without sound for a few seconds.
CD player
Automatic Power On/Off (Standby): only possible
with the COMPU LINK-3 and COMPU LINK--4
connection
CD recorder
The connected components turn on and off (standby) along with the
receiver.
When you turn on the receiver, one of the connected components
will turn on automatically, depending on which component has been
previously selected.
When you turn off the receiver, the connected components will turn
off (standby).
Cassette deck
or
MD recorder
COMPU LINK – 4
(SYNCHRO)
Turntable
Synchronized Recording
Synchronized recording means the cassette deck (or MD recorder)
starts recording as soon as a CD or a record begins playing.
To use synchronized recording, follow these steps:
1. Put a tape in the cassette deck (or an MD in the
MD recorder), and a disc in the CD player (or a
record on the turntable).
Notes:
• There are four versions of COMPU LINK remote control system.
This receiver is equipped with the fourth version — COMPU LINK4. This version is added systematic operations with the CD recorder
to the previous version — COMPU LINK-3.
• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use
either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it
is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the
turntable or CD player in the diagram above.)
• To operate the cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU
LINK remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See
page 16.)
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your audio components.
This remote control system allows you to use four functions listed
below.
2. Press the record (¶) button and the pause (8)
button on the cassette deck (or MD recorder) at
the same time.
This puts the cassette deck (or MD recorder) into recording
pause.
If you do not press the record (¶) button and pause (8) button at
the same time, the synchronized recording feature will not
operate.
3. Press the play (3) button on the CD player or on
the turntable.
The source changes on the receiver, and as soon as play starts,
the cassette deck (or MD recorder) starts recording. When the
play ends, the cassette deck (or MD recorder) enters recording
pause, and stops about 4 seconds later.
Notes:
Remote Control through the Remote Sensor on the
Receiver
You can control the connected audio components through the remote
sensor on the receiver using this remote control. Aim the remote
control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver. For details, see
pages 49 and 50.
• During synchronized recording, the selected source cannot be
changed.
• If the power of any component is shut off during synchronized
recording, the COMPU LINK remote control system may not
operate properly. In this case, you must start again from the
beginning.
41
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
41
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system has been developed to deal with the disc information recorded in the
CD Text* and MDs. Using these information in the discs, you can operate the CD player or MD recorder equipped with
the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system through the receiver.
CONNECTIONS:
FUNCTIONS:
To use this remote control system, you need to connect the CD
player and/or MD recorder you want to operate, following the
procedures below.
1. If you have already plugged your CD player, MD
recorder, and this receiver into the AC outlets,
unplug their AC power cords first.
2. Connect your CD player, MD recorder, and this
receiver as follows, through the COMPU LINK
jacks and TEXT COMPU LINK jacks.
This remote control system allows you to use the functions listed
below.
Displaying the Disc Information on the TV screen
Disc information such as its performer and disc title (and track titles
only when a CD Text is selected) is shown on the TV screen.
Disc Search: Only for CD Player
This remote control system can allow you to search for discs by the
performer, disc title, and music genre.
With this disc search, you can easily find the disc you want to play.
Disc Title Input:
1) COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the monaural
mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).
CD player
MD recorder
If your CD player or MD recorder has the disc memory function,
you can input the following information about the normal audio CDs
or MDs on the TV screen.
• For CDs: Performer, disc title, and music genre
• For MDs: Disc title and song titles
*What is a CD Text?
In a CD Text, some information about the disc (its disc title, performer,
composer, arranger, etc.) is recorded.
COMPU LINK – 4
(SYNCHRO)
2) TEXT COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the
stereo mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).
CD player
MD recorder
TEXT
COMPU LINK
3. Connect your CD player, MD recorder and this
receiver, using the cables with RCA pin plugs (see
pages 5 and 6).
4. Plug the AC power cords of these components
above into the AC outlets.
5. When turning on these components for the first
time, turn on the connected components first,
then turn on this receiver.
Notes:
• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use
either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it
is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the CD
player in the diagram in the left column.)
• If your audio component has two TEXT COMPU LINK jacks, you
can use either one. If it has only one TEXT COMPU LINK jack,
connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For
example, the CD player in the diagram in the left column.)
• “TEXT COMPULINK SOURCE NOT CONNECTED” appears on the
display in the following cases:
– When the connections explained in the left column are not
correctly done.
– When you try to use the TEXT COMPULINK function a few
seconds after you turn on the connected equipment. This is not a
malfunction of the units.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your CD player or MD
recorder.
IMPORTANT:
If you turn on the receiver before turning on the other components
after connecting the components, the TEXT COMPU LINK remote
control system does not work correctly.
If this happens:
1. Turn off all the components including this receiver.
2. Turn on the connected components.
3. Turn on this receiver.
42
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
42
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
OPERATIONS:
To use this remote control system, you need to connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 7), and set the
TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is
connected. Make sure you have connected the CD player or
MD recorder equipped with the TEXT COMPU LINK
remote control system. If not, you cannot use the
following functions.
On-Screen Operation buttons (on the remote control)
CATV/DBS
POWER
VCR 1
TV
AUDIO
POWER
POWER
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
SURROUND
DSP
ON/OFF
MODE
LINE DIF.ECT
BASS
BOOST
When you press TEXT
DISPLAY, “MENU” appears
on the display window for
about 10 seconds.
ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
INPUT
ROOM
SIZE
EFFECT
1
2
TEST
CTR TONE
4
5
3
MENU
MIDNIGHT
MODE
LIVENESS
6
ENTER
SOUND
∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
8
7/P
MUTING
∗
DIGITAL EQ
10
0
RETURN
FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
TV/VIDEO
∗
REAR L
+
∗BAL L
∗
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
∗BAL R
MENU
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
−
PLAY
PAUSE
9
∗
REAR R
+10
PLAY
100+
Note on 7:
EXIT
+
The following information will appear on the display:
• For CD Texts — Disc title, Performer, Genre, Song writer,
Composer, Arranger, Message
Only recorded information will be shown. If there is no data, “NO
DATA” will appear.
• For MDs — Disc title
If there is no data, “NO DATA” will appear.
VOLUME
−
EXIT
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
PAUSE
FF/
SET
FF/
SET
REC
PAUSE
1 Source name: CD or MD
or
, then press SET to change the disc.
2 Select
3 Track numbers and track titles.
• When you move
to a track number, you can
change the track information by pressing 2 / 3. Each
time you press the button, track information alternates
between its track title and its performer. (You can also
start playing the track by pressing SET.)
in front), then press SET to go to
4 Select this (move
the DISC SEARCH screen (see page 44).
in front), then press SET to go to
5 Select this (move
the TITLE INPUT screen (see page 45).
6 This appears only when a CD Text is selected.
7 Disc information such as the disc title, performer, and
music genre.
in front), you can change the
When this is selected (
disc information by pressing 2 / 3. Each time you press
the button, disc information (see “Note on 7”) changes.
or
, then press SET to change the track.
8 Select
9 Usable buttons and their functions for the current
selection.
Indication here will be changed according to what is
in front) on the screen. See “Note
currently selected (
on 9.”
DOWN – TUNING – UP
DOWN – TUNING – UP
STOP CONTROL
RM-SRX8010J
STOP
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
Note on 9:
For example, the SET button will be used to start play (PLAY), to go to
the next screen (ENTER), and to determine the selection (ENTER).
To exit from the Disc information screen:
Press EXIT.
Notes:
Showing the Disc Information on the TV
Screen
Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” or “MD” is
selected as the source.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
• The on-screen display will disappear in the following cases:
– if no operation is done for about 10 minutes.
– if you do any operation other than explained in this section.
• To control the MD recorder using the TEXT COMPU LINK remote
control system, you have to change the source name shown on the
display from “TAPE” to “MD.” (See page 16.)
• Some special characters and marks cannot be displayed correctly.
• The on-screen display is shown in black and white.
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
5
9
43
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
43
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player)
Search for a disc by its performer:
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
press SET.
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears .
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “PERFORMER”,
then press SET.
Search for a disc by its disc title:
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “DISC TITLE,”
then press SET.
The DISC TITLE SEARCH
screen appears.
The PERFORMER SEARCH
screen appears.
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the
first character of the performer you want to
search for, then press SET.
To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the correct character, then press SET.
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the
first character of the disc title you want to search
for, then press SET.
To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the correct character, then press SET.
Note:
Symbols such as @, # or $ cannot be available for search.
Note:
Symbols such as @, # or $ cannot be available for search.
5. Press SET again.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen,
showing the performers,
appears.
6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 /
to a searched disc, then press 2 / 3. Each time
∞ to move
you press 2 / 3, the disc information alternates between its
performer and its disc title.
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
screen (see page 43): Press 5 / ∞ to move
to a searched
disc, then press SET.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 / ∞ until they
appear.
• Going back to the PERFORMER SEARCH screen: Press
EXIT.
5. Press SET again.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen,
showing the disc titles,
appears.
6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 /
to a searched disc, then press 2 / 3. Each time
∞ to move
you press 2 / 3, the disc information alternates between its
disc title and its performer.
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
screen (see page 43): Press 5 / ∞ to move
to a searched
disc, then press SET.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 / ∞ until they
appear.
• Going back to the DISC TITLE SEARCH screen: Press
EXIT.
44
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
44
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
Search for a disc by its genre:
Entering the Disc Information
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “GENRE”, then
press SET.
The GENRE SEARCH screen
appears.
You can use the disc memory function through this receiver.
The disc information (its performer, disc title, and music genre) of
normal audio CDs will be stored into the memory built in the CD
player.
For the disc memory function, refer to the manual supplied with
your CD player.
• The performer, disc title, and music genre information are usually
recorded in a CD Text. However, if a CD Text has no genre
information recorded in the disc itself, you can input its music
genre by yourself.
Note:
You can enter the TITLE INPUT screens for a CD Text and input its
titles. However, you cannot store the titles you have input for a CD
Text.
Example: Entering the following information for Disc 1
Performer: “MICHAEL”
Disc title: “MY FAVORITE”
4. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to the genre you
want to search for, then
press SET.
To show the unseen genres,
press 5 / ∞ until they appear.
For the CD Player with the disc memory function:
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen,
showing the disc titles,
appears.
5. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 /
∞ to move
to a searched disc, then press 2 / 3. Each
time you press 2 / 3, the disc information alternates between
its disc title and its performer.
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
to a searched
screen (see page 43): Press 5 / ∞ to move
disc, then press SET.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 / ∞ until they
appear.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “TITLE INPUT,”
then press SET.
The TITLE INPUT/
PERFORMER screen appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move
in front of a character you want, then
press SET to enter the character.
• If the current CD is a CD Text, go to step 5 without entering
the performer.
To use the lower case letters, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to
, then press SET.
To use the upper case letters again, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move
to
, then press SET.
• Going back to the GENRE SEARCH screen: Press EXIT.
Continued to the next page.
45
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
45
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
4. Repeat step 3 until you
finish putting a
performer name (up to
32 characters).
To insert a space, press 5 / ∞
to
,
/ 2 / 3 to move
then press SET.
To correct an incorrect character:
1) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to + or =, then press
SET until the incorrect character is selected.
to
, then press SET
2) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to erase the character.
3) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the correct
character, then press SET to enter the correct character.
5. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move
to “DISC 1:
MICHAEL (in this
example),” then press
SET.
• If the current CD is a CD
Text, go to the next step
without entering the disc
title.
7. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move
to “DISC 1:
MY FAVORITE (in
this example),” then
press SET.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 / ∞ to move
to “TITLE INPUT,”
then press SET.
3. Enter the title,
referring to steps 3 and
4 of “For the CD Player
with the disc memory
function.”
• You can enter up to 32
characters for the disc title.
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move
to the disc title
you have just entered,
then press SET.
The TITLE INPUT: DISC 1
GENRE screen appears.
8. Press 5 / ∞ to move
then press SET.
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “MD” is selected as
the source.
The DISC TITLE INPUT
screen appears.
The TITLE INPUT: DISC
TITLE screen appears.
6. Enter the disc title,
referring to steps 3 and
4.
For the MD recorder:
You can write the disc information (disc title and song titles) into the
disc. You can only write the song title for the song currently
selected.
• If you have the CD-MD combination deck, you can also enter the
disc information (its performer, disc title, and its music genre) of
normal audio CDs into the memory built in the CD-MD
combination deck. (To do this, follow the procedure of “For the
CD Player with the disc memory function.”)
• If you change the disc or song title with more than 32 characters,
the characters following 32nd will be erased from the title.
The disc title is stored into the
memory, and the SONG
TITLE INPUT screen for the
currently selected song
appears.
• You can enter a song title for the song currently selected.
to the genre you want,
The Disc Information screen appears again.
To show the unseen genres, press 5 / ∞ until they appear.
5. Enter the song title, referring to steps 3 and 4 of
“For the CD Player with the disc memory
function.”
• You can enter up to 32 characters for the song title.
6. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to the song title
you have just entered, then press SET.
The song title is stored into the memory, and the Disc
Information screen appears again.
46
EN36_46.RX-8010V[J]_f
46
01.1.11, 9:10 PM
AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC video components (TV, VCR, and DVD player)
through the receiver.
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which added a function to operate JVC video components through the video
components terminals. To use this remote control system, you need to connect the video components you want to operate, following the
diagrams below and the procedure on the next page.
CONNECTIONS 1: AV COMPU LINK Connection
VCR 1
DVD player
TV
VHS
DVD
CAUTION:
AV
COMPU LINK
AV
COMPU LINK III
AV
COMPU LINK
You can only connect to the TV
with the AV COMPU LINK EX or
AV COMPU LINK III terminal.
DO NOT connect to the TV with
AV COMPU LINK RECEIVER/
AMP terminal.
AV
COMPU LINK EX
AV
COMPU LINK III
IMPORTANT:
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the
DBS tuner connected to the TV SOUND/DBS and DBS component
video terminals, and video components connected to the VIDEO
and VCR 2 terminals on the receiver.
Notes:
• When connecting the receiver and a TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use Automatic
Selection of TV’s Input Mode (see page 48).
• When connecting only the VCR 1 or DVD player to this receiver, connect it directly to the receiver using cables with the monaural mini-plugs.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your video components.
CONNECTIONS 2: Video Cable Connection
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals — S-video, composite video, or component video, and the signals coming
into this receiver through one type of video terminals can output only through the same type of the terminal. So you need to connect the VCR
and/or DVD player to the TV using one of the following three ways:
CASE 1
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the S-video terminals, connect also this
receiver to the TV’s Video Input 1 terminal using S-video cables.
Source
Equipment
S-video cable
RX-8010VBK
S-video cable
TV
To Video Input 1
Note:
If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the S-video terminals, change the video input
terminal setting to "S/C" (see page 16).
CASE 2
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the composite video terminals, connect also
this receiver to the TV's Video Input 2 terminal (composite video input) using composite video cables.
Source
Equipment
Composite
video cable
RX-8010VBK
Composite
video cable
TV
To Video Input 2
(Composite)
Note:
If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the composite video terminals, change the video
input terminal setting to "S/C" (see page 16).
CASE 3
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver using the component video terminals, connect also
this receiver to the TV's Video Input 2 terminals (component video input) using component video cables.
Source
Equipment
Note:
Component
video cable
RX-8010VBK
Component
video cable
TV
To Video Input 2
(Component)
If you connect the DVD player and the DBS tuner to this receiver using the video component terminals, change the
video input terminal setting to "COMPNT" (see page 16).
47
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
47
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
1. If you have already plugged your VCR 1 (VCR
connected to the VCR 1 jacks), DVD player, TV
and this receiver into the AC outlets, unplug their
AC power cords first.
2. Connect your VCR 1, DVD player, TV and this
receiver as follows, using the cables with the
monaural mini-plugs (not supplied).
• See “CONNECTIONS 1” on the previous page.
3. Connect the audio input/output jacks on VCR 1,
DVD player, TV and this receiver using the cables
with RCA pin plug.
• See pages 6 and 7.
4. Connect the video input/output jacks on VCR 1,
DVD player, TV and this receiver, using the
cables with RCA pin plug, with
S-video plug or with component video plugs.
• See “CONNECTIONS 2” on the previous page.
5. Plug the AC power cords of the components into
the AC outlets.
6. When turning on the TV for the first time after
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV
volume to the minimum using the TV volume
control on the TV.
7. Turn on the other connected components first,
then turn on this receiver.
• When turning on the VCR 1, use the remote control supplied
with this receiver (press VCR 1 POWER).
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use the
five basic functions listed below.
Remote Control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR
Using This Remote Control
See page 51 for details.
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each
target component.
One-Touch Video Play
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the
VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), you can enjoy the
video playback without setting other switches manually. The
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “VCR 1.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
position so that you can view the playback picture.
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the play
3) button on the VCR 1 or on the remote control. So, you can get
(3
the same result.
One-Touch DVD Play
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input jacks
on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the receiver
automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD” or
“DVD MULTI.”
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD
DGTL.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
Automatic Selection of TV’s Input Mode
• When you select “TV” as the source to play on the receiver, the
TV automatically changes the input mode to the TV tuner so that
you can watch TV.
• When you select “DVD,” “DVD MULTI,” “VCR 1,” “VCR 2,”
“VIDEO” or “DBS” as the source to play on the receiver, the TV
automatically changes the input mode to the appropriate position
(either Video Input 1 or Video Input 2) so that you can view the
playback picture.
Notes:
• When connecting a TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal to
this receiver, you cannot use a component video cable (as case 3
on page 47). Connect the TV using a S-video or composite video
cable (as cases 1 and 2).
• When you select “TV” as the source on the receiver, you cannot
see the menu on the TV screen since the AV COMPU LINK remote
control system automatically changes the TV’s input mode to the
TV tuner.
If you do not mind stopping listening to the TV sounds, you can
then show the on-screen displays after changing the TV’s input
mode to the appropriate position the receiver is connected to.
Automatic Power On/Off
The TV, VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), and DVD
player turn on and off along with the receiver.
When you turn on the receiver;
• If the previously selected source is “VCR 1,” the TV and VCR 1
will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “VIDEO,” “VCR 2,” or “TV”
or “DBS,” only the TV will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “DVD” or “DVD MULTI,” the
TV and DVD player will turn on automatically.
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, VCR 1 and the DVD player
will turn off.
Note:
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR 1, the VCR 1
will not turn off, but continue recording.
48
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
48
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components
You can operate JVC’s audio and video components with this receiver’s remote control, since control signals for JVC
components are preset in the remote control.
Operating Audio Components
IMPORTANT:
Tuner
You can always perform the following operations:
FM/AM:
To operate JVC’s audio components using this remote control:
• You need to connect JVC audio components through the COMPU
LINK (SYNCHRO) jacks (see page 41) in addition to the
connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 5 and 6).
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the
receiver.
• If you use the buttons on the front panel or the menu function to
choose a source, the remote control will not operate that source.
To operate a source with the remote control, the source must be
selected using source selecting buttons on the remote control.
• To operate the cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU
LINK remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See
page 16.)
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.
Alternates between FM and AM.
After pressing FM/AM, you can perform the following operations:
1 – 10, +10:
TUNING UP 3/DOWN 2:
FM MODE:
Selects a preset channel number
directly.
For channel number 5, press 5.
For channel number 15, press +10,
then 5.
For channel number 20, press +10, then
10.
Tunes into stations.
Changes the FM reception mode.
Sound control section (Amplifier)
You can always perform the following operations:
SURROUND ON/OFF:
Turns on or off the Surround modes
– Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital,
and DTS Digital Surround.
Selects the DSP modes.
DSP MODE:
After pressing SOUND, you can perform the following operations:
CATV/DBS
POWER
VCR 1
POWER
TV
POWER
AUDIO
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
SURROUND
DSP
ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
ON/OFF
MODE
INPUT
LINE DIF.ECT
BASS
BOOST
EFFECT
ROOM
SIZE
1
2
TEST
CTR TONE
LIVENESS
4
5
3
6
MENU
MIDNIGHT
MODE
ENTER
SOUND
∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
8
7/P
MUTING
0
+10
FM MODE
100+
10
RETURN
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
TV/VIDEO
9
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
+
∗BAL L
∗
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
∗BAL R
MENU
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
−
PLAY
PAUSE
+
VOLUME
−
SUBWFR then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the subwoofer output level.
CENTER then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the center speaker output
level.
REAR L then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the left rear speaker output
level.
REAR R then LEVEL +/ –: Adjusts the right rear speaker output
level.
DIGITAL EQ then LEVEL+/ –:Selects the audio band and adjusts
its frequency level.
EFFECT:
Selects the effect level.
TEST:
Turns on or off the test tone output.
CTR TONE:
Selects the center tone.
ROOM SIZE:
Selects the room size.
LIVENESS:
Selects the liveness.
EXIT
Note:
FF/
SET
REC
PAUSE
DOWN – TUNING – UP
STOP CONTROL
After adjusting sounds, press the corresponding source selecting
button to operate your target source by using the 10 keys; otherwise,
the 10 keys cannot be used for operating your target source.
RM-SRX8010J
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
CD player
Note:
When you press one of the following buttons mentioned in
this section, the operation mode appears on the display
window for about 10 seconds. For example, the above
illustration shows that you have pressed CD.
Buttons
FM/AM
CD
CDR
PHONO
TAPE/MD
CONTROL (repeatedly)
SOUND
49
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
49
Indications
TUNER
CD
CDR
PHONO
TAPE
VCR 1
TAPE
CDR
CDDSC
SOUND
After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the
CD player:
3 PLAY:
4:
¢:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
1 – 10, +10:
Starts playing.
Returns to the beginning of the current
(or previous) track.
Skips to the beginning of the next track.
Stops playing.
Pauses playing. To release it, press
3 PLAY.
Selects a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10,
then 10.
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
CD changer
After selecting “CDDSC” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you
can perform the following operations on a CD changer:
3 PLAY:
4:
¢:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
1 – 6, 7/P:
Starts playing.
Returns to the beginning of the current
(or previous) track.
Skips to the beginning of the next track.
Stops playing.
Pauses playing. To release it, press
3 PLAY.
Selects the number of a disc installed in
a CD changer.
CD recorder
After pressing CDR (or selecting “CDR” by pressing CONTROL
repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on a CD
recorder:
3 PLAY:
4:
Starts playing.
Returns to the beginning of the current
(or previous) track.
Skips to the beginning of the next track.
Stops playing.
Pauses playing. To release it, press
3 PLAY.
Selects a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10,
then 10.
¢:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
1 – 10, +10:
After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the
CD changer:
1 – 10, +10:
Selects a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10,
then 10.
EXAMPLE:
• Selecting disc number 4, track number 12, and starting playback.
1. Press CONTROL repeatedly until “CDDSC” appears on the
display window, then press 4.
2. Press CD, then press +10, 2.
If your CD changer is of 200-disc loading capability (except for
XL-MC100 and XL-MC301)
you can do the following operations using the number buttons after
pressing CD.
1. Select a disc number.
2. Then select a track number (always enter two digits).
3. Start playback.
EXAMPLES:
• Selecting disc number 3, track number 2, and starting playback.
Press 3, then, 0, 2, then 3 PLAY.
• Selecting disc number 10, track number 5, and starting playback.
Press 1, 0, then, 0, 5, then 3 PLAY.
• Selecting disc number 105, track number 12, and starting
playback. Press 1, 0, 5, then 1, 2 then 3 PLAY.
Turntable
After pressing PHONO, you can perform the following operations
on a turntable:
3 PLAY:
7 STOP:
Starts playing.
Stops operations.
Notes:
• When you start recording on the CD recorder, use the buttons on
the CD recorder itself or on the remote control supplied with it.
• You can use either CDR or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed
above. If you press CDR, the playing source also changes. On the
other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “CDR,” the
playing source does not change.
Cassette deck
After pressing TAPE/MD (or selecting “TAPE” by pressing
CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations
on a cassette deck:
3 PLAY:
REW:
FF:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
REC PAUSE:
Starts playing.
Fast winds the tape from right to left.
Fast winds the tape from left to right.
Stops operations.
Pauses playing. To release it, press
3 PLAY.
Enters recording pause.
Notes:
• You can use either TAPE/MD or CONTROL to activate the buttons
listed above. If you press TAPE/MD, the playing source also
changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to
select “TAPE,” the playing source does not change.
• When you use a cassette deck, change the source name
connected to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 16).
MD recorder
After pressing TAPE/MD, you can perform the following operations
on the MD recorder:
3 PLAY:
4:
¢:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
REC PAUSE:
Starts playing.
Returns to the beginning of the current
(or previous) track.
Skips to the beginning of the next track.
Stops playing.
Pauses playing. To release it, press
3 PLAY.
Enters recording pause.
Note:
When you use an MD recorder, change the source name connected
to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 16).
50
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
50
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks)
You can always perform the following operations:
Operating Video Components
VCR 1 POWER:
IMPORTANT:
To operate JVC’s video components using this remote control:
• You need to connect JVC video components through the AV
COMPU LINK jacks (see page 47) in addition to the connections
using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 6 and 7).
• Some JVC VCRs can accept two types of the control signals —
remote code “A” and “B.” Before using this remote control, make
sure that the remote control code of the VCR connected to the VCR 1
jacks is set to code “A.”
– When another JVC VCR is connected to the VCR 2 or VIDEO
terminals, set its remote control code to code “B.” (This remote
control cannot emit the control signals of code “B.”)
• When using the remote control:
– For the DVD player and VCR 1 operations, aim the remote
control directly at the remote sensor on each component, not on
the receiver.
– For the TV having the AV COMPU LINK EX or AV COMPU
LINK III terminal, aim the remote control directly at the remote
sensor on the TV.
Turns on or off the VCR 1.
After pressing VCR 1 (or selecting “VCR 1” by pressing
CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations
on the VCR 1:
1 – 9, 0:
3 PLAY:
REW:
FF:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
REC PAUSE:
CH +/–:
Selects the TV channels on the VCR.
Starts playing.
Rewinds a tape.
Fast winds a tape.
Stops operations.
Pauses playing. To release it, press
3 PLAY.
Enters recording pause.
Changes the TV channels on the VCR.
Note:
You can use either VCR 1 or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed
above. If you press VCR 1, the playing source also changes. On the
other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “VCR 1,” the
playing source does not change.
DVD player
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the
following operations on a DVD player:
3 PLAY:
4:
CATV/DBS
POWER
VCR 1
TV
AUDIO
POWER
POWER
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
SURROUND
DSP
¢:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
ON/OFF
MODE
INPUT
LINE DIF.ECT
BASS
BOOST
EFFECT
1
2
MIDNIGHT
MODE
TEST
CTR TONE
LIVENESS
4
5
6
ROOM
SIZE
3
MENU
After pressing DVD or DVD
MULTI, these buttons can be used
for the DVD menu operations.
ENTER
∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
SOUND
8
7/P
MUTING
9
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
10
0
+10
RETURN
FM MODE
100+
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
TV/VIDEO
Starts playing.
Returns to the beginning of the current
(or previous) track.
Skips to the beginning of the next track.
Stops playing.
Stops playing temporarily. To release it,
press 3 PLAY.
+
∗BAL L
∗
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
∗BAL R
MENU
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
−
PLAY
PAUSE
+
−
FF/
SET
REC
PAUSE
3
MENU
CTR TONE
LIVENESS
5
6
ENTER
For detailed menu operations, refer to
the instructions supplied with the
discs or the DVD player.
EXIT
2
TEST
4
Note:
VOLUME
ROOM
SIZE
EFFECT
∗L/R BAL
8
DOWN – TUNING – UP
STOP CONTROL
RM-SRX8010J
TV
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
You can always perform the following operations:
Note:
When you press one of the following buttons mentioned in
this section, the operation mode appears on the display
window for about 10 seconds. For example, above illustration
shows that you have pressed VCR 1.
Buttons
VCR 1
DVD or DVD MULTI
TV/DBS
CONTROL (repeatedly)
Indications
VCR 1
DVD
TV
VCR 1
CDDSC
TAPE
CDR
TV POWER:
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Turns on or off the TV.
Adjusts the volume.
Sets the input mode (either TV or
VIDEO).
After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following operations
on a TV:
CH +/–:
1 – 9, 0, 100+:
RETURN:
Changes the channels.
Selects the channels.
Alternates between the previously
selected channel and the current
channel.
51
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
51
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video Equipment
This remote control supplied with the receiver can transmit control
signals for other manufacturers’ VCRs, TVs, CATV converters,
DBS tuners and DVD players. By changing the transmittable signals
from preset ones to the other manufacturers’, you can operate the
other manufacturer’s components using this remote control.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s TV
When operating the other manufacturers’ components, refer also to
the manuals supplied with them. To operate these components with
the remote control, first you need to set the manufacturer’s code
each for VCR, TV, CATV converters, DBS tuners and DVD players.
2. Press TV/DBS.
After replacing batteries for the remote control, you need to set the
manufactures’ codes again.
1. Press and hold TV POWER.
3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the list below to find the code.
4. Release TV POWER.
The following buttons can be used for operating the TV:
TV POWER:
TV VOL +/–:
TV/VIDEO:
Turns on and off the TV.
Adjusts the volume.
Sets the input mode (either TV
or VIDEO).
After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following
operations on a TV:
CATV/DBS
POWER
VCR 1
TV
AUDIO
POWER
POWER
POWER
DVD
DVD MUILTI
CD
FM/AM
TV/DBS
VIDEO
CDR
PHONO
VCR 1
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
USB
SURROUND
DSP
CH +/–:
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10):
ANALOG/DIGITAL SLEEP
ON/OFF
MODE
INPUT
LINE DIF.ECT
BASS
BOOST
EFFECT
1
2
ROOM
SIZE
3
Note:
MENU
MIDNIGHT
MODE
TEST
CTR TONE
LIVENESS
4
5
6
Refer to the manual supplied with your TV.
ENTER
SOUND
∗SUBWFR ∗L/R BAL ∗CENTER
MUTING
∗DIGITALEQ ∗REAR L ∗REAR R
8
7/P
0
+10
100+
+
∗BAL L
∗
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
−
TV/VIDEO
∗BAL R
MENU
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
9
FM MODE
10
RETURN
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
Changes the channels.
Selects the channels.
The 10 button will function as the
ENTER button if your TV requires
pressing ENTER after selecting a
channel number.
−
PLAY
PAUSE
5. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV POWER.
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV,
try each one until the correct one is entered.
+
VOLUME
−
EXIT
FF/
SET
REC
PAUSE
DOWN – TUNING – UP
STOP CONTROL
Manufacturer
JVC
RM-SRX8010J
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
Note:
When you press one of the following buttons mentioned in
this section, the operation mode appears on the display
window for about 10 seconds. For example, the above
illustration shows that you have pressed TV/DBS.
Buttons
TV/DBS
CATV/DBS CONTROL
VCR 1
DVD or DVD MULTI
Codes
Indications
TV
DBS
VCR 1
DVD
00, 02, 13, 14,
47, 74
AKAI
01, 02
BLAUPUNKT 03, 04,
FISHER
01, 05
GRUNDIG
03, 06, 07
HITACHI
08, 09, 10, 49
IRADDIO
02
ITT/NOKIA
11, 12
LOEWE
06, 15, 16
MAGNAVOX 08, 17, 49
METS
50, 51, 52, 53
MITSUBISHI 08, 18, 19, 20
MIVAR
21
NORDMENDE 22, 23
OKANO
15
PANASONIC 24, 25, 26, 27
76
PHILIPS
15, 17, 28, 75
Manufacturer
Codes
QUELLE
52, 53, 54, 55,
56, 57, 58, 59,
60, 61, 62, 63,
64, 65, 66, 67
RCA/
08, 24, 29, 30,
PROSCAN
31, 48
SABA
32, 33, 68, 69,
70
SAMSUNG
06, 08, 16, 34,
35, 49
SANYO
01, 05
SCHNEIDER 02, 15, 36
SHARP
37, 38, 77
SONY
39
TELEFUNKEN 40, 41, 42, 69
THOMSON
71, 72
TOSHIBA
37, 43, 44
ZENITH
45, 46
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
52
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
52
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
To change the transmittable signals for
operating a CATV converter or DBS tuner
1. Press and hold CATV/DBS POWER.
2. Press CATV/DBS CONTROL.
3 Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the following lists to find the code.
4. Release CATV/DBS POWER.
The following buttons can be used for the CATV converter and
DBS tuner:
CATV/DBS POWER:
CH +/–:
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10):
Turns on and off the CATV converter
or DBS tuner.
Changes the channels.
Selects the channels.
The 10 button will function as the
ENTER button if your equipment
requires pressing ENTER after
selecting a channel number.
Note:
Refer to the manual supplied with your CATV converter or DBS
tuner.
5. Try to operate your CATV converter or DBS
tuner by pressing CATV/DBS POWER.
When your CATV converter or DBS tuner turns on or off, you
have entered the correct code.
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
CATV converter or DBS tuner, try each one until the correct
one is entered.
For CATV converter
Manufacturer
Codes
GENERAL INSTRUMENT 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 29
HAMLIN/REGAL
01, 02, 03, 04, 05
JERROLD
06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14
OAK
15, 16, 17
PANASONIC
18, 19, 20
PIONEER
21, 22
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
23, 24, 25
TOCOM
26
ZENITH
27, 28
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If
they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the
equipment.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s VCR
1. Press and hold VCR 1 POWER.
2. Press VCR 1.
3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the list on the next page to find the code.
4. Release VCR 1 POWER.
The following button can be used for operating the VCR:
Note:
VCR 1 POWER:
You cannot use both of the CATV converter and DBS tuner at the
same time.
After pressing VCR 1, you can perform the following operations
on the VCR:
CH +/–:
For DBS tuner
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
AMSTRAD
BLAUPUNKT
ECHOSTAR
GOLDSTAR
GRUNDIG
HIRSHMANN
INSTRUMENT
ITT/NOKIA
KATHREIN
NEC
ORBITECH
PHILIPS
RCA
SAMSUNG
SCHWAIGER
SIEMENS
SONY
TECHNISAT
56, 57, 67
43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49
30
50, 51, 67
31
32, 33
48, 52, 53, 54, 55
68
34
52, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63
35, 36
48
37, 38
65
39, 40
61, 64
41, 42
66
48
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If
they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the
equipment.
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10):
3 PLAY:
REW:
FF:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
REC PAUSE:
53
Changes the TV channels on the
VCR.
Selects the TV channels.
The 10 button will function as the
ENTER button if your VCR requires
pressing ENTER after selecting a
channel number.
Starts playback.
Rewinds a video tape.
Fast winds a video tape.
Stops operation.
Pauses.
Enters recording pause.
Note:
Refer to the manual supplied with your VCR.
5. Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR 1
POWER.
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
VCR, try each one until the correct one is entered.
53
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
Turns on and off the VCR.
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
AIWA
BELL & HOWELL
BLAUPUNKT
CGM
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GE
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
LOEWE
MAGNAVOX
MITSUBISHI
NEC
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
ORION
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
RCA/PROSCAN
SABA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
00, 26, 27, 28, 29, 58
01, 02
03
04, 05
06, 07
08, 10, 11, 12, 64, 65
03, 14, 15, 16, 17
01
18, 19, 20
07
13, 21
06, 22
18, 23, 24, 25, 66
07, 21
04, 19, 24
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35
26, 27
03, 36
38
09
19, 24, 39, 40
04, 19, 21, 24, 41, 42
21
04, 18, 19, 23, 24, 43, 44, 45
38, 46
45, 47, 59, 61, 62, 63
03, 48, 49
37, 50
03, 51
52, 53, 54
55, 60
43, 44
56, 57
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice.
If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the
equipment.
After pressing DVD, these buttons
can be used for the DVD menu
operations.
ROOM
SIZE
EFFECT
2
3
MENU
Note:
TEST
CTR TONE
LIVENESS
4
5
6
ENTER
∗L/R BAL
For detailed menu operations, refer to
the instructions supplied with the discs
or the DVD player.
8
Note:
Refer to the manual supplied with your DVD player.
5. Try to operate your DVD player by pressing one
of the above buttons.
• DO NOT forget to turn on the DVD player before pressing
one of the above buttons.
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
DVD, try each one until the correct one is entered.
Manufacturer
JVC
DENON
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
SAMSUNG
SONY
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
Codes
00, 02
01
03
13
04, 05, 06
07
08
09
10
11, 12
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice.
If they are changed, this remote control cannot operate the
equipment.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating a DVD player
1. Press and hold AUDIO POWER.
2 Press DVD.
3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the following list to find the code.
4. Release AUDIO POWER.
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the
following operations on a DVD player:
3 PLAY:
4:
Starts playing.
Returns to the beginning of the
current (or previous) track.
Skips to the beginning of the next
track.
Stops playing.
Stops playing temporarily. To release
it, press 3 PLAY.
¢:
7 STOP:
8 PAUSE:
54
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
54
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC
service center.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
The display does not light up.
The power cord is not plugged in.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. (See
page 10.)
No sound from speakers.
Speaker signal cables are not connected.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if
necessary. (See pages 4 and 5.)
The SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 buttons are not
set correctly.
Press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 correctly. (See page
13.)
An incorrect source is selected.
Select the correct source.
Muting is activated.
Press MUTING to cancel the mute. (See
page 13.)
An incorrect input mode (analog or
digital) is selected.
Select the correct input mode (analog or
digital). (See page 20.)
Connections are incorrect.
Check connections.
For analog connections, see page 5.
For digital connections, see page 8.
For USB connection, see page 9.
Speaker signal cables are not connected
properly.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if
necessary. (See pages 4 and 5.)
The balance is set to one extreme.
Adjust the balance properly. (See page 16.)
USB device is not selected on the
computer.
Select “USB Audio Device [1]” for
“Playback” of “Audio” (see page 9).
Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC.
“Mute” is selected on the PC.
Check if the volume is set at low level.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC.
Noise while reproducing PC sound
connected with a USB cable.
Strong electromagnetic wave is emitted
from such as television.
Move the PC away from the device such as
TV emitting strong electromagnetic wave.
Sound from PC connected with a USB
cable is intermittent.
PC is subjected to excessive load due to
using other applications.
Close the applications you do not use.
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM
reception.
Incoming signal is too weak.
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact
your dealer. (See page 3.)
The station is too far away.
Select a new station.
An incorrect antenna is used.
Check with your dealer to be sure you have
the correct antenna.
Antennas are not connected properly.
Check connections. (See page 3.)
Occasional cracking noise during FM
reception.
Ignition noise from automobiles.
Move the antenna farther from automobile
traffic.
Noise is heard
An earth (H) cable is not connected to the
AM (H) terminal on the rear panel.
Connect the cable to the AM (H) terminal
on the rear panel.
No sound effect such as DSP mode and
digital equalization.
The line direct function is turned on.
Turn off the line direct function. (See page
14.)
Howling during record playing.
Your turntable is too close to the
speakers.
Move the speakers away from the turntable.
Sound from one speaker only.
No sound from PC connected with a USB
cable.
55
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
55
01.1.12, 9:23 AM
PROBLEM
“OVERLOAD” starts flashing on the
display.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
Speakers are overloaded because of high
volume.
1. Press POWER on the front panel to turn off
the receiver.
2. Stop the playback source.
3. Turn on the receiver again, and adjust the
volume.
Speakers are overloaded because of short
circuit of speaker terminals.
Press POWER on the front panel, then check
the speaker wiring.
If “OVERLOAD” does not disappear, unplug
the AC power cord, then plug it back again.
If speaker wiring is not short-circuited, contact
your dealer.
The STANDBY lamp lights up after
turning on the power, but soon the
receiver turns off again (into standby
mode).
The receiver is overloaded because of a
high voltage.
Press POWER on the front panel to turn off
the receiver. After unplugging the AC power
cord, consult your dealer.
Remote control does not work.
There is an obstruction in front of the
remote sensor on the receiver.
Remove the obstruction.
Batteries are weak.
Replace batteries. (See page 10.)
An incorrect remote control operation
mode is selected.
Select the correct remote control operation
mode. (See page 52.)
Remote control does not work intendedly.
56
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
56
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
Specifications
Amplifier
Output Power:
At Stereo operation:
Front channels:
120 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω, 20
Hz to 20 kHz with no more than 0.08% total
harmonic distortion.
At Surround operation:
Audio
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance (1 kHz):
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)* :
Front channels:
100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz with no
more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Center channel:
100 W, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than
0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Rear channels:
100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no
more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
PHONO (MM):
2.5 mV/47 kΩ
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
200 mV/47 kΩ
Coaxial: DIGITAL 1 (DVD):
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Optical: DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV), DIGITAL 4 (CDR):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)
*Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital Surround (with
sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).
USB:
Audio Output Level:
Digital output:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/’78 IHF):
Revision 1.0, full-speed (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)
VCR 1, VCR 2, CDR, TAPE/MD:
200 mV
Optical: DIGITAL OUTPUT:
Signal wave length: 660 nm
Output level: –21 dBm to –15 dBm
PHONO (MM):
70 dB/78 dB (at REC OUT)
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
92 dB/80 dB (LINE DIRECT ON)
Frequency Response (8 Ω):
PHONO:
20 Hz to 20 kHz (±1 dB)
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
20 Hz to 100 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB)
USB:
20 Hz to 20 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB)
RIAA Phono Equalization:
±1.0 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
Bass boost:
+6 dB ±1.0 dB at 100 Hz
Video
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Composite video:
S-video:
Component video:
Video Output Level:
Composite video:
S-video:
Component video:
Synchronization:
57
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS:
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS:
(Y: luminance):
(C: chrominance, burst):
DVD, DBS:
(Y: luminance):
(PB, PR):
VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:
VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:
MONITOR OUT:
Negative
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
45 dB
On-Screen Color System:
NTSC
57
(Y: luminance):
(C: chrominance, burst):
(Y: luminance):
(PB, PR):
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
FM tuner (IHF)
Tuning Range:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Usable Sensitivity:
Monaural:
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Monaural:
21.3 dBf (3.2 µV/75 Ω)
Stereo:
41.3 dBf (31.5 µV/75 Ω)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A weighted):
Monaural:
Stereo:
78 dB at 85 dBf
73 dB at 85 dBf
Total Harmonic Distortion:
Monaural:
Stereo:
0.4% at 1 kHz
0.6% at 1 kHz
Stereo Separation at REC OUT:
Alternate Channel Selectivity:
Frequency Response:
35 dB at 1 kHz
45 dB: (±400 kHz)
30 Hz to 15 kHz: (+0.5 dB, –3 dB)
AM tuner
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
Loop antenna
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
400 µV/m
50 dB (100 mV/m)
General
Power Requirements:
AC 120V
Power Consumption:
320 W/440 VA (at operation)
2 W (in standby mode)
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Mass:
, 60 Hz
435 mm x 156.5 mm x 425 mm
(17 3/16 in. x 6 3/16 in. x 16 3/4 in.)
11.5 kg (25.4 lbs)
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.
58
EN47_58.RX-8010V[J]_f
58
01.1.11, 9:11 PM
QUALITY
SERVICE
HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER
TOLL FREE : 1-800-537-5722
http://www.jvcservice.com
Dear customer:
In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase, read the instruction booklet before operating the unit. In the event that repair
is necessary, or for the address nearest your location, please refer to the factory service center list below or within the Continental
United States, Call 1-800-537-5722 for your authorized servicer. Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.
—JVC
JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING
COMPANY OF AMERICA
DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.
FACTORY SERVICE CENTER LOCATIONS
10 New Maple Avenue
Pine Brook, NJ 07058-9641
(973) 396-1000
1500 Lakes Parkway
Lawrenceville, GA 30243-5857
(770) 339-2582
705 Enterprise Street
Aurora, IL 60504-8149
(630) 851-7855
5665 Corporate Avenue
Cypress, CA 90630-0024
(714) 229-8011
2969 Mapunapuna Place
Honolulu, HI 96819-2040
(808) 833-5828
10700 Hammerly, Suite 110
Houston, TX 77043
(713) 935-9331
13 Cummings Park
Woburn, MA 01801
(781) 376-9100
8192 State Road 84
Davie, FL 33324
(954) 472-1960
890 Dubuque Avenue
South San Francisco, CA 94080-1804
(650) 871-2666
Sophisticated electronic products may require occasional service. Just as quality is a keyword in the engineering and production of
the wide array of JVC products, service is the key to maintaining the high level of performance for which JVC is world famous. The
JVC service and engineering organization stands behind our products.
NATIONAL HEADQUARTERS
JVC SERVICE & ENGINEERING COMPANY OF AMERICA
DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.
1700 Valley Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
If you ship the product • • •
Pack your JVC unit in the original carton or one of equivalent
size and strength. Enclose, with the unit, a letter stating the
problem or symptom that exists and also a copy of the
receipt or bill of sale you received when you purchased your
JVC unit. Print your home return address on the outside
and the inside of the carton. Send to the appropriate JVC
Factory Service Center as listed above.
Don’t service it yourself.
CAUTION
To prevent electrical shock, do not open the cabinet. No user
serviceable parts inside.
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
ACCESSORIES
To purchase accessories for your JVC product, you may contact your local JVC Dealer.
Or from the 48 Continental United States call toll free : 800-882-2345
(1099)
RX-8010V[J]Warranty_f
2
01.1.11, 5:57 PM
LIMITED WARRANTY
AUDIO-2
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forth below ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL
PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVE MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP from the date of original retail
purchase for the period as shown below. (“The Warranty Period.”)
PARTS
LABOR
2YR
2YR
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY(50) UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND IN
COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.
WHAT WE WILL DO:
If this product is found to be defective, JVC will repair or replace defective parts at no charge to the original owner. Such
repair and replacement services shall be rendered by JVC during normal business hours at JVC authorized service centers.
Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of the Warranty Period. All products and parts thereof may be
brought to a JVC authorized service center on a carry-in basis except for Television sets having a screen size 25 inches and
above which are covered on an in-home basis.
WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:
Return your product to a JVC authorized service center with a copy of your bill of sale. For your nearest JVC authorized
service center, please call toll free: (800)537-5722.
If service is not available locally, box the product carefully, preferably in the original carton, and ship, insured, with a copy of
your bill of sale plus and letter of explanation of the problem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the name and location
of which will be given to you by the toll-free number.
If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our Customer Relations Department.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED:
This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:
1. Products which have been subject to abuse, accident, alteration, modification, tampering, negligence, misuse, faulty
installation, lack of reasonable care, or if repaired or serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by JVC to
render such service, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products, or if the model number or serial number
has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed;
2. Initial installation and installation and removal for repair;
3. Operational adjustments covered in the Owner’s Manual, normal maintenance, video and audio head cleaning;
4. Damage that occurs in shipment, due to act of God, and cosmetic damage;
5. Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;
6. Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus(Needle) are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase;
7. Accessories;
8. Batteries (except the Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase);
There are no express warranties except as listed above.
THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, IS
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN.
JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY OTHER
DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE TO
TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF
THIS WARRANTY. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied
warranty last, so these limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you
may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA
DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.
1700 Valley Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPARATE WARRANTY, THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY. FOR DETAILS OF
REFURBISHED PRO DUCT WARRANTY, PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATION
PACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.
For customer use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial No. which is located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
RX-8010V[J]Warranty_f
Model No.:
Serial No.:
Purchase date:
Name of dealer:
3
01.1.11, 5:57 PM
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
V
EN
RX-8010V[J]COVER_f
J
2
01.1.11, 5:56 PM
C
0101NHMMDWJEIN